Professional Documents
Culture Documents
in
2007
IVIicrosoft
Corporation
http://www.archive.org/details/1883introductoph00kohluoft
3^/
HH-
DC
AN INTEODUCTION
TO
PHYSICAL MEASUEEMENTS
AN INTRODUCTION
TO
PHYSICAL MEASUEEMENTS
WITH APPENDICES ON
ABSOLUTE ELECTEICAL MEASUEEMENT,
ETC.
By Dr. F^^^OHLRAUSCH,
PBOFESSOE-IN-ORDINAET AT THE UNIVERSITY OF WUEZBURG.
SECOND EDITION
QTranslatElJ
By
from Hjz
JFourt]^
ennan
CHt(it{0it
B.A., B.Sc.
AND
F.C.S.
Lk
LONDON
CHURCHILL
NEW BURLINGTON STEEET
J.
&
A.
1883
lo
PEEFACE.
The Author,
German
edition,
He
seldom of
much
the student
gives
which
all
in himself
and
he
in the laws
is
investi-
to
by means
lead him,
is
verified,
to that
we have thought
its
know-
when he has
to
of the treatise
is
so important
From
this
of
of
of measure-
is
merely to confuse
the
experience
of physical laws
him confidence
gating.
says, a truth
than by a
it
by
literal
make
their
own
apparatus, or to put
it
together.
is
but very
ele-
book of reference
and
PKEFACE.
vi
new
additional
section
at the
by the Translators
end
the book.
of.
Author only
for
intended by the
is
demand.
to
what these
of the
well-known
In
it
much
made
Thermometry
section on
The magnetic
determinations of the
German Admiralty.
and
In the absolute
inserted, as
grammes
those of Gauss
well as
on millimetres and
milli-
grammes.
additions, but a
any judgment
it
and he de-
as to priority.
tables
first edition.
to
CONTENTS.
Introductory.
1
2.
Quantities
3.
PAGE
4.
5.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
by Equal
Intervals
10
I.
6.
4rt.
18
21
22
Methods
....
...
......
......
for Solids
1 5.
11
16
23
26
29
30
32
33
35
38
39
40
42
45
47
48
49
CONTENTS.
Vlll
50
50
55
56
19.
Atmospheric Pressure.
II.
20. Determination
of
.......
Barometer)
21.
22. Freezing
Calibration of Thermometers
Comparison
of
Thermometers
24. Air-Thermometer
By Measuring
By Weighing
the Length
.
by Heat
Expansion of Liquids
27. Boiling-point of a Fluid
28. Determination of the Humidity of the Air (Hygrometry)
29.
of Specific Heat (Method by Mixture)
30.
31.
32.
59
60
Heat.
III.
23.
58
Method by Cooling
Methods by Melting Ice
Specific Heat,
for
63
65
72
73
76
77
77
78
.79
.
79
80
84
88
89
Heat of Two
92
IV. Elasticity.
33. Determination of the
Rod by
Modulus
Stretching
Modulus of
.
Elasticity of a
.
Wire or
.
of Elasticity
37a. Determination of
Note
tlic
93
95
98
....100
36.
Torsion of a Wire by swinging
number
102
of Vibrations of a Musical
104
IX
CONTENTS.
V. Light.
by Wollaston's
105
....
....
(Goniometer)
General Rules
of the
107
107
110
111
113
118
118
119
120
121
122
122
124
125
126
128
Prism
of Deviation
by Total
Reflection
Measurement
43.
of
Wave-Length
of a Radius of Curvature
With Spherometer
By
Reflection
Convex Lenses
Concave Lenses
45. Magnifying Power of an Optical Instrument
Lens
.
Telescope
12^9
129
129
132
133
134
137
139
Microscope
46. Saccharimetry
(Soleil)
140
143
144
.146"
.146
52.
Time
of Oscillation of a
53. Reduction of
small Arc
Time
.
Magnet
.148
149
.151
.154
CONTENTS.
PAGE
54.
Moment of Inertia of
By Calculation
Body
156
156
158
159
Experimental Determination
55. Coefficient of Torsion
.
VII. Magnetism.
......
......
....
.....
tlie Compass
Measurement of Horizontal Intensity of
Magnetism by Gauss's Method
Determination of
Determination of
the
160
164
166
Eartli'
166
167
MT
31
Arrangement
First
168
Second Arrangement
170
175
177
179
'.
......
VIII. Galvanism.
63. General
Galvanic Batteries
Connections for Galvanic
Galvanic Resistances
.
.186
and Galvanometers
By
By
By
By
71.
Substitution
Differential
Galvanometer
Wheatstone's Bridge
the Differential Inductor
185
187
188
.191
.192
Mirror Galvanometers
66a. Current Measurement with Weber's Electro-DjTiamometer
67. Absolute Measurement of Currents by the Tangent-Compass
68. Current Measurement in Chemical Units with the Voltameter
69. Reduction-Factor of a Galvanometer
70. Galvanic Resistances with the Rheostat
66.
182
.182
.184
Work
Efficiency of Batteries
192
193
.196
.200
.
202
202
204
.....205
.209
.....209
.
209
210
212
CONTENTS.
XI
PAGE
72.
Eesistance of an Electrolyte
Do.
Do.
219
220
.221
74.
.214
.214
215
.218
.218
(Bosscha)
.223
223
.224
222
222
Do.
Do.
(Dubois-Raymond)
.
75. Siemens's Universal Galvanometer
76. Determination of an Electromotive Force in Absolute Measure
.
Ohm's Method
Poggendorf 's Method
Measurement of Horizontal Force by Galvanic Methods
.
77.
By
the
Bifilar
Bifilar
.231
230
230
Galvanometer
With the
225
226
228
228
.230
the Voltameter
With
79.
by the
Earth-
Inductor
81.
233
235
237
....
240
243
244
246
IX. Electrostatics.
84.
Kirchhoflf)
(Riess)
250
251
251
251
252
.252
.....
......
248
248
253
253
253
254
254
CONTENTS.
Xll
....
PAGE
255
257
259
260
260
261
262
263
264
265
88. Theodolite
at
Noon
....
XI. Appendices.
A. The Absolute System of Electrical Measurement
Space and Time
Mechanical Measures
Electrostatic Measures
Magnetic Measures
Galvanic Measures
Connection of Absolute Galvanic Measure witl
Current Work
B. Determination of Wave-Length of Spectral Lines by Com
parison on the Refraction Spectrum
C. Measurement of Potential by Thomson's Electrometers
Portable Electrometer
Quadrant-Electrometer
D. Condensers or Accumulators
E. Additional Methods of Determining Resistance
.
.....
By
....
....
.....
....
......
Difference of Potential
'
By
I.
Tables
Index
....
.........
269
273
273
276
277
282
288
289
292
292
293
294
296
296
296
296
297
298
299
301
301
302
303
303
304
305
341
ERRATA.
Page
for
{2,,
denominator
13, in
,,
(VI
1)
,,
,,
49, line 9
,,
51, line 24
for
,,
,,
92, last
,,
93, line 13
for
Ch = ax
,,
93, line 19
for
eo-l
,,
"
for t\ read
read
J/
^z-dz
131, line 20
for
,,
,,
^,
178, line 28
,,
181, line 21
,,
193, line 24
,,
lie)
('-.i
1)
1'".
(1
^^.
and
iV^.
read
eal
e-al.
z-dz
read ^.
in a line with
c.
for
- read -^
T=
read T'
etc.
read 3f
s]
Oh -f
read/
bottom
for
?i.
Jj
^ read
Ik
<^_^_W should be
,,
iVo read n^
read
+ e=al
'2
20;
'
and
for
1)
t.
for n^
(^ + ^Y
for (1
62, last
93, line
1"
15,
81, line 11
formula
for la read
/j
[^ {n
1)].
read
formula
1).
for
read
from bottom
(2?i
formula;
i (271
for
read
1)
of
etc.
'^J.
,,
,,
218, line 22
,,
222, line 8
,,
,,
233, line 9
for a
not 75.
to 74,
mm.
read a
.,
,,
235, line 22
,,
248, lines
,,
7,
for a,
and 16
.,
1
n
e
^
a
254, for formula read -?
*i
read
,,
254, line 3
for
x,
,,
277, line 5
for
x read
etc.
read
a,
<p,
etc.
for c read
10, 15,
mm.
<p,
k^.
*.
for
\/
=-^
a-^, a.,,
sin
read
\/
4> ^
sin
<p'.
ao, a,.
sin
<j>'
^'^ad
PHYSICAL MEASUREMENTS.
Mean and Probable
Erroks of Observation.
1.
Error.
of a physical quantity
affected with
is
If the same
error from the inaccuracy of the observation.
measured,
we
require
some
repeatedly
been
quantity have
means
of calculating the
to
the
amount
When
all
the
determinations
separate
are,
in
the
that
is,
all
terminations.
We may
it
is
generally quite
greater number.
mean
value.
now the
mean value,
If
there will be found greater or less differfrom the amount of which the prohablc error of an
observation as well as that of the result can be found by the
the
ences,
following rules.
errors,
i.e.
First, the
sum
is
taken of the
sqiiares
of the
is
'
ERRORS OF OBSERVATION.
together.
diminished by
square root of
If
now
mecm
the
is
mean
this
number
mean
1
it
we
error; the
single observation.
error be divided
of observations,
error of
obtain
sufficient
unknown
that
it is
it is
greater,
and
call
^2'
the
^3
sum
mean
^" ^'le
mean
observation -
siuirle
?"
'^
fi,a
{n
1)
0-6745
'
.
n-
1'
=
On
0-6745
(w
1)
unknown
quantities
see (3).
expressed by quantities
thus
calculated,
which
that
is,
error
is
is
intro-
by such
But there may exist constant errors, the cause of which may
be in the indications of the instrument, or which may be
SO related to
problem either
to
result, or to
errors whicli
an important
find out such errors and then correct the
It
is
Found.
52
9-662
9-673
9-664
9-659
9-677
9-662
9-663
9-680
9-645
9-654
049
019
009
131
0-000004
083
000
024
172
004
001
259
357
0-000098
0-0019
091
001
161
189
0-0099
>S= 0-001002
Mean 9-6639
the
the
10 we have
Then
since
mean
mean
0-001002
0-011,
0-0033,
9
P
/OOOl 002
V/
*
probableerrorof oneobservation=0-6745
probable
error of the result
^
=0-6745
10
=0-0071,
10
9
V/ -^^^-^=0-0023.
.
INFLUENCE OF EREOES
The probable
error
of only 10
an approximation.
deduced from a
series
was
it
-| might
have been used instead of 0'6745.
The determinations given above were made by different
ol^servers, using different sets of weights and different therErrors of the balance, which influence the
mometers.
determination of density in one direction only, are not taken
as
we have
done.
into account.
in this
example.
But
amounts of
error
we must be
when weighed
in water.
not constant
supposed circumstances the
mean
Otherwise the
show themselves
if
Errors of this
value.
2.
Result.
We
tion,
it
by observa-
Hence
formulpe.
arises
The
when
how
the observed
error.
may sometimes
we
we may
accuracy.
learn from
it
is
the result of
ON THE RESULT.
several obsen'atious,
Such
given on
p.
170
is
(p.
magnitude
may
following rules
1.
be
much
simplified.
"We
first
note the
In determining the errors in the result, it is sufficient to use an approximate value for the observed
Indeed we
magnitude, which we have called x.
are always compelled to do so, since the true, accurate value is not
known.
2.
3.
If
observations, the
final
result will be
an expression
INFLUENCE OF ERRORS
compounded
of the
Several of these
may
be affected by
errors.
But
if
The
which
arises
from an error of
5.
From
4 and 5
ai-e
of course inapplicable.
shorter
These
may
easily be constructed
dX
p
'
dx
tlie
error to a simple
it will, if
not always yet very often, be possible to adopt the plan for
the calculation of correction quantities given at the end of
this article
it
to
1,
upon which
for
may
be at once used.
ON THE KESULT.
When
combined,
we may,
p. 5), investi-
Each
of
mum
when
The
The employment
is
We
of a solid
body is weighed in air and in water. We will determine the effect of an error in weighing upon the density deduced
If we call the weight of the body in the air
from this weighing.
m, and the weight in water Wi', the density is
wliich the
To
this
formula must of course be added the corrections dependair, and upon the expansion
2, p. 5, we need not trouble
-r^
/",
III
Using formula
m
VI
8, p.
1+i
VI
The
result
first
in
we
11,
+j -
-,
VI
VI
VI,
Hi
f
-
\
III
VI
-m
fHL^
{m-vi
m-~-}ii
term of the
last
expression
so that
F=
'"'
-f(7;;
ni
is,
'
. .
INFLUENCE OF EEKORS
air.
be too small by
^
The
jr~.
f-,
''
{m- m)
dm
(wi
- mj'
in water,
m - {m
m - ni! - f
+ f)
+ -^
m mA\ 1
That
/',
is
we
make
we
If, finally,
its
mm
+/
m )'
7r.>
(in
**
= f,
jr^
m)
_ m') (l ,^,)
to say,
shall
111
{,n
maximum
errors of observation
value
/ and
~--^ when
m)
/', this
either vi
is
com-
has ob-
was found
((III
too great
error
and
The
jyrohahle total
is
^/F' +
F"=
'.'{fmy +
db
(in
ifmf
7ny
We will take in addition, as a numerical example, the determination of the density of the same body of which we have
already spoken, p. 3.
We have there determined the amount of
the error by the difference of the results which Ave obtained from
We
mean value.
want now to see what amount of error
to be expected from inaccurate observation in the weighing.
their
The weight
round numbers,
is
ON
TIIK RESULT.
\)
The
the water,
whence
accurate,
is less
/'
5 mgrs.
= 8mgrs.
on
711,
"
-3-
0"0017 =
^^r,.^
^-^_
8-243600
5-218400
r.
i'
"^'='-25200^=='''^^^^=^-
".
ing
(bubbles of air, inaccuracy in determining the temperature,
mistakes in reckoning up the weights).
As a second example, the measurement of the strength of a
If <p be
galvanic current i with the tangent compass may serve.
the angle of deflection of the needle, we have
i= C
C is a factor
/ occur in the
where
error
tan
<p,
If an
constant for the same instrument.
reading off of the angle f the error F in i
,
follows from
i
or
by formula 10
F=C tim
{^
+f),
(p. 11),
i-i.
F^C
(tan
'^
f
cos
-'2-); therefore
cosy/
.2/
f
<p
sill.
<p
COS
ip
s/n I
<p
RULES FOE APPEOXIMATION.
10
^
2f
sin 2
is
i,
which
<p
of nearly 90,
for ^
45.
When,
the expression.
much
greater.
11
Where
the sign
or
=f is
8)
+ mS.
-mS.
(I)
(l-8f=l-28.
(2)
v/l-S =1-|8.
(3)
-J- =1+8.
(4)
(1-8)'"
(1+S'
^1 +
=1+28.
=l +
1-8.
1+8
^
(1
i5.
1-8
-^, =
- 28.
(1-sr
sr
^=L
1-|S.
v/i+S
=1 +
28.
(5)
IS, etc.
(6)
v/l-S
(1
8)(1 )
{1
.) (1
-,;)
(1
C)...
SC...
(7)
^i\ V. =
^y)
S)
= sin x +
tan (x
^cos
x,
+ 8) = cos x 8 sin x,
8
+ 5(10)
cos {x
+ S) = tan
cos x,
in
which
(57-3), for
3.
is
measured in terms
of the angle
Method
of Least Squares.
the
METHOD OF
12
lation,
mean
is
to
known
pliysical
to find the
served magnitudes.
many
For
purpose at least
quantities
and
if
this
make
as
many
unknown
many, we must, by
unknown
quantities,
way.
of which the
devices, especially
employ
by various
to a
plan
determined beforehand.
Nevertheless, these devices require very careful and circumspect consideration in order to exclude any uncertainty,
and not unfrequently fail us entirely.
Hence, it is import-
are made.
y
a and
/<
are
=a+
bjc.
for determining
which two
13
LEAST SQUARES.
we should have
y,
therefore
a^
hx^
=a
y,
Ix^,
="*--^*,S = ?'l^.
But more than two observations may have been made ; suppose
besides the pairs given above, x^, y^^p y^,'^^^- If the observations
were free from error, the quantities sought, a and h, would have
the same numerical value
when
calculated from
and, on the other hand, every value of //, calculated by this formula
from the corresponding value of x, would be identical Avith the
But, in reality, we find that on account of errors
observed value.
no values for a and b completely satisfy all the observations.
when
the differences
If
sum
the
is
we denote
known
{x),
the magnitudes
we
wliich
we
call a, b
sion
seek occur in
=/
> &
as
constants
is
(a^)-
ing to the
it
By
when they
-/ (^,)} +
'
{y.
-/(^^.^}
"'
+ k.-/ (^3)} +
a
or,
'
minimum.
{^'^
-/(^");
"'
METHOD OF
14
y /(a;)} = a
We
must keep
By
mind
in
known observed
tliat
minimum.
the values of x and y are
all
quantities.
duces as
many
be determined.
with respect to
...
a, h
"
^-^
da
We
coefficient to zero.
.
are to be determined
= 0,
''
and
so on.
free
of as
many
observations as
please.
Of course
it
may
must
by
In such cases we
and approximation.
In the
however, where / (x) has the form, / (x) =
by
find a solution
important case,
a
}^
do
we
s| y -/()
+ bx + c-i + c^x' +
trial
is
always possible.
a minimum,
or briefly
Differentiation gives
{y- a-
with respect to a
with respect to
'^x {y
Xa =
an,
%y an b ^^ =
^xy
-a^x-b
bx)
a bx) =
^x' =
0.
'
LEAST SQUARES.
By
15
h,
we have
(%^y n %x
h
%x Xy n %xy
(^xf
n %x\
As an example, suppose
is
to be corrected
temperature
the length
at
a;
40
20
= 1000-22
50
1000-65
60
1000-90
lOOTOS mm.
In order to shorten the calculations we take as y only the observed excesses of the length above 1000 mm.
We shall then
have for a the excess of the length at 0 above 1 metre.
The
calculation
is
performed as follows
20
40
50
GO
therefore a
^a;'
= 8100
'
xy
4-4
26-0
45-0
63-0
txy = 138-4
.138-4-2-82.8100
,,,^^ mm.
= 170
= -0-196
170'-4.8100
5
2-82-4.
= 170.
138-4
170'- 4. 8100
of the rod at 0
the temperature
now
400
1600
2500
3600
^^ = 2-82
The length
If
y
0-22
0-65
0-90
1-05
Sa;=170
/,
999-804
is
= +0-212 mm.
therefore 999-804
+ 0-212
mm., and
shall find
20
40
50
60
Error
Calculated
Observed
mm.
mm.
1000-228
1000-652
1000-864
1001-076
1000-22
0-65
0-90
1-05
at
/.
A"
mm.
+0-008
+0-002
-0-036
-0-026
0-000064
0004
1296
0676
^a'- 0-002040
we
CALCULATIOX BY EQUAL INTERVALS.
16
is
irregular
the natural
is,
ft,
same
It
number
them are
The
so-called
mean
error of
an
observation is obtained in
problem from the sum of the differences between observed and calculated magnitudes, if ?i = number of observato be determined, as
tions, m that of the constants a, &, c
this
a; + a;
-f
A,,^
4, ra
2,
we have
'0-00204
4-2
= ^HAQo
d= 0.032 mm.
occurs
served,
for instance,
when
by equal
in-
a periodic
phenomenon
is
ob-
is
l7
The values
may
of
found as a series
V-^,
y^
'
Vniy
be thus
l/n-
great,
observations,
necessary
is
it
we should
tliat
calculate the
interval as
(
n-1)
(y,,-y^)
+ (;t-3)(j/,,_i-yj+
71
{n'-
I)
interval,
a;,
Since
1, X,
=2
a:,i_i
= ?i
Xn
1,
= n.
now
^a;=
(ft
1) 4-
hn {n
1),
and
tx'=V+2'+
+ (n-iy +
;r
= ^n
(n
1) (2/i
1),
so (p. 15).
(Xxf - nXx'
^ n{n-\-l) (y,+y,+
in'
{n+lY-^7i' {n+l){2,+
+{n-l) yn-i+ny,
l)
CORRECTIONS
18
(n
^ y^
?/,
(n
^i(7i
- 3) +
+ y ^-i (3-w) +
+ l) [i(+l)-i] (2u + 1)
-?i)
y (1
follows.
4.
The
observations
much more
which
circumstances
determinations.
number
must not be
With
from the
by
accurate
of influencing circumstances
Hence
work
is in-
also it is necessary to
How
far
is
necessary, in as
we may
go in taking-
observations, as well as
laws
of nature
involve.
it is
frequently unnecessary
much
very
tliis
limit.
It is
is
materi-
upon the
tion
result.
calculation of corrections,
much
any
injury.
tions
is
is
AND THEIR
this directly
19
OI|\.LCULATION.
the errors
first
which are made up of those due to the inaccuracy of our readings, and of our judgment about them,
and to some faults not to be calculated on, of the balance
of observation,
as friction,
is
change of the
make
It
from error.
And as we do not suppose specially good instruments or accurate observations, other errors unavoidable,
but determinable in their amount, and therefore to be eliminated from the result, become noticeable in the data given
directly
by the
balance.
It
is
To
accuracy.
we make any
pretensions to
arms
(9)
errors of weighing.
(to
of the air, a
magnitude which
may
we must know
the density
limits.
common
use,
even in
scientific in-
mean value
to the correction.
If,
therefore,
we
may
give a
confine our-
result
may
mean value
will
improvement of the
Of
not be sufficient.
In this
case, the
may be found
in Table 6.
With
a further
20
expands by heat
this
The
same is true of the scale on which the height is measured.
The variation of gravity on the earth's surface wouhl also
have
to
amount
of vapour of water,
Now,
observations and
calculations were
would become very
laborious.
But here, what we have said above comes into
use.
After we have informed ourselves as to what degree of
accuracy we desire or can attain in the result, and as to the
if
all
these
we
succeeds in
find that
latter,
an approximation
and, with
some
practice,
its
usually possible to
scribed on
make use
of the processes
de-
p.
Almost
Examples.
(1.)
It is well
known
Strictl}^
speaking,
in the ratio
1
3at
-I-
3a'f
at,
+ af.
is
IXTERrOLATION FKOM OBSEKVATIOXS.
(2.)
^--^^^--g-
by putting
tion
21
= - O'OOOIS/^
/
(formula
barometer
8, p. 11),
Here we
to 0.
p,
p-8,
for
which
j)
^''Kp^= v//^^'
Now
much
as
^P^X
l (p^
=p
have
"^^'e
-/
= ^\^ ~ -^7/
(Fo^-^"^^ 3.)
xoVo
P-
^^^
^^^^ ^^^
~2
4c(.
It frequently
produced.
is
some, and
It
is
sometimes indeed
nevertheless
often
impossible, to
trou1:)le-
regulate the
its
volume,
tivity, are to
its
elasticity,
be determined
and
its
electrical
in a weighing to
conduc-
employ such
is
tedious,
RULES FOR THE NUMERICAL CALCULATIONS,
22
0.
it
is
and thus
required,
in the
expenditure of
in exactness.
all,
e^
If these
two positions
lie
e is
and
to e that
proportional to
x,
- x^
- e) =
(x^
- x^) - {e^ - ej
= x^-\-{e
gj)
{e
whence
x
It is
sides of
e^
and
e^
at
opposite
e.
5.
figures, a
only be
circumstance
to be brought out to so
many
them,
ADJUSTING AND TESTING A BALANCE.
23
accurate.
is to be
given in the result, for by the neglecting of further figures
the last place may by degrees become wrong to the amount
of several units.
is
but one by 1
if
the figure
rejected be 5 or more.
prefixed to a decimal,
figures.
Example.
The determination of the density of the body
already mentioned so many times (p. 3) gives the second place
pretty accurately, but the third not so much so.
This, therefore,
we must go. In the mean value from ten observahowever, one more place may be given. We use here 5figure logarithms for calculating the result, since 4 figures are to
be correct.
is
as far as
tions,
6.
The
descriptions
construction
is
commonly used
which follow
kef)t in
refer, so far as
view, to the
any special
in chemical analysis.
means
Where
of
this
ADJUSTING AND TESTING
24
it
seconds).
Slower
oscil-
irregularities in the
tion useless.
When
the pointer
made
balance
is
provided for
it,
when
the
by the arrangement
the purpose (screws or movable weights at
This
unloaded.
effected
is
The
it is
balance must
fulfil
the follow-
When
the balance
is
swinging
freely,
the distance
it
When
the
stopjung apparatus
is
raised,
the pointer
and
rests
balance
is
We
The equality
wliich
is
known
to
l)e
tlie
case
of,
A BALANCE.
25
same position
the balance
in
The
in whatev^er part
of the scale-pan
effect of a
it
is
On
placed.
the
curing a balance
The
should
also, as
it
It
case,
To
move very closely in front of the divisions, or, still better, above
them.
As to the size of the divisions, about a millimetre is
to
be recommended.
It is less
should be of the same weight, than that the shorter pan pro-
weight
to
To preserve from
tlie
influence
A^essel filled
of
rust,
and
to
exclude as
much
as possible
is
placed
in the balance-case.
is
when
stopped.
the load
any apparatus
is
may
Swinging of
After
It
is
WEIGHING BY OBSERVING
26
7.
of weighing in
is
moved
the balance swings equally on both sides of the middle diviFirst, it requires that the pointer
shall
point
balance
is
accurately
loaded.
It
to
the
middle
division
when
the
ment
of the balance,
next place,
it
is
time.
In the
riders.
Finally,
make
it is
as a rule better to
but on a
trial as to
differ.
Since
swinging.
Where we
to observe
first
and
last
27
is,
Example
Turning points.
No. 1.
10-4
2.
Now,
10-3
10-3
91
Means.
Zero.
10-33
9-15
^.^
'*
^
5.
4.
3.
9-2
by weights
and
in the other,
beam
at last
by moving
to another.
Make
equilibrium
determine
falls
it
e^,
we
P
p
the position
the position
e,
positions of equilibrium
the weights
E-e P-p'
therefore p^
=p +
{P -p)
~^^'
28
sign,
simply, thus
give the difference a of position (the deviation), which corresponds to 1 mgr. increase of the weight.
If, further, we de-
is
may
number
of
given by division
Compare
Example.
The value
to be 9-74.
Weight.
mgr.
Turning point.
rest.
"^'^
^'8
3036
3037
Mean. Point of
10-3
^'^
7-9
7-83
10-25
9-04
9-3
9-40
10-50
9-95
10-2
^"4
10-5
10-5
Deviation for
mgr.
9-95-9-74
0-91
weight
0-21
^
= ,0-23
moT
0-91
|5^
3G 77
-
mgr.
With
= 303G +
1^1^
= 3036-77.
tion, since
method.
29
SENSITIVENESS OF A BALANCE.
The
oscillation slioukl
amount
between
to
and 4
scale
divisions.
as above.
8.
By
we mean
the difference
The
means
for if
we
is
given,
to
it is
of simpli-
possess a table in
deter-
is
when
different
enough, in addition
observation
we call it c.
Now, by adding a weight
of
is to
e',
is
either
intervals of load.
30
Ou
On
which requires
But as this con-
to
produce
By
it for
mean
load.
is
still
Hence
with
in-
9.
when
The
observed
is
balance
Left.
we
have,
balance
if
left
and
weighing
j^I
P -j^ +
r,
and right
'
2p'
OF A BALANCE.
31
as a negative weight
Proof.
may
be considered
According
1).
to the
i(p + /)=i2.P.
from which, by formula3 8 and
B_
fp+l^
L
Example
1.
'
p+r
\f
+^
Balance carries
2p
100 grms.
Left.
(20
10
...)
(50)
Z= -0-83
or
2.
Balance
grms.)
500 grms.
carries
Eight.
3-3 mgr.
(200)
(100
^
mgr.
mgr.
^^=1-0000339.
(200)
:?=
+ 0-83
+ 2-56
= 2-56
Left.
(100+100
in each pan.
Eight.
(50 grms.)
(20 + 10 + ...)
Example
we have
11,
3, p.
3-3
^"^"^"'^
0-7
= 1-0000065.
400Q00
From
= (20 + 10
0-86 mgr.
100)
2-0 mgr.
.
.
the second
(200) - (100
32
10.
The influence
balance
of the
eliminated
is
if
inequality
arms
of the
of
the
by
Should this
proceeding
1.
to
ratio
double weighing
be weighed
first
left-hand one.
and
the lengths of
the right and left arms of the balance, and p^ and p^ the
weights which must be placed upon the right and left pans
respectively to balance the body; and
if
we
weight P, then
FL = Fp^
PR = Lp_
whence
From
this
we can
also
the arith-
from each
arms
R
L
p^
'2p,
p,
is
obtained.
The weights
EEDUCTION TO THE WEIGHT IN VACUO.
11.
The
i.e.
its
33
object of weighing a
body
is to
determine
its
mass,
The equality
of the masses of
two bodies
by the equality
per-
we
call
of the
balance
it
body
in
air, i.e.
(X=0'0012
as a
mean
=m
= A,
in the air
value.
=A
= h,
M = ^^(l + A-6)There
is therefore to
is
and 3
much
the greater as
greater.
It is almost
so
is
Table
weights
may
body
^= M
-r>
A.
In
be taken from
8.
Proof.
weights
i^
The volume
= -K-
of the
Every body
loses in
is
that of the
W,
34
with
or
8,
we
have,
by formula 8
M =171
r-
1-A
Example.
The
(p.
^),
iu comparison
11)
o-^^)
correction of the
apparent weight
brass weights (5
quantity of water
of
= 8 '4),
amounts to
m.
0-0012f--
-- j =m
O'OOIOG,
ie.
1-06
mgr.
in
every
gramme.
and p
j.
The proportion
therefore to
0-0012 \
(llo-Oo'l2) =
The uncorrected
great.
in
value
''
O'l
% too
correction must,
35
12.
a set of
errors of
many
which the
ratio of the
weights to
deduced.
in analysis, the
50'
20'
10"
10'
5'
2'
1'"
1"
side, and
5eit
Suppose
it 1has been
omter is
found that the balance is in equilibrium, i.e.
in the same position as when the balance is uniimQeed, when
double weighing
is
Eight.
Left.
50'
20'
+ 10'+
20'
10'
mgr.
10'
L~ ^
50'
and
= 20'+
r mcrr.
50',
is
(9)
100,000
10'
.+
In the same way 20' is compared with 10' + 10", and 10'
The relation of the balance
with 10" and also with 5' + 2' +
.
arms
is
A weight
arms,
is
is,
load,
but when
y has
been
p
reduced to ^ ^ when weighed on
the
left
hand.
COREECTION OF
36
-OSS
Example. Let r=
50'
20'
10'
1= 2-53
+ 5' +
10"
2'
1'
1" 1'"
0-85 mgr.
and ^-1-0000336.
Further,
if it
10", that
Eight.
+ 10"
Left.
20'
10'
0-91 mgr.
(10'
10'+
10") 1-0000336,
+ 0-67
10"
mgr.
then that
20'
=10'+
10"
-0-24 mgr.
20'
=20' + 10' +
= 10' +10"
10"=
5'
where
+^
+B
+C
of course A, B, C,
From
10'
may
must be
expressed in terms of some unit the sum of the single grammes
being provisionally considered as one weight.
If a comparison
with a normal weight be not made at the same time, this unit is
so chosen that the correction of the separate weights shall be as
small as possible, which is the case when the whole sum is assum^ed
i.e. when we consider
to be correct
these equations the values of the 5 weights
50'
Now
it is
20'
easily found,
10'
by
first
= 100000
mgr.
50' + 20'
+ 10'+
Calling therefore
To
- ^
A SET OF WEIGHTS.
37
we have
5'
10'
= 10000 mgr.
-;S^
10"
-10000
= 10000
- s+c
- S+D
- 2S+B+C
- 5S + A + B +
+ 2' +
= 20000
= 50000
= 50000
20'
50'
2C+D
IA.
= 2'+l' +
= I' + l"
1"
1'
1'"=
1'
5'
As
1"
+r" +
+b
+c
+d
a+2b+'4:C+2d + S-D
10
"
we have
r = 1000
1" =1000
mgr.
1"'
= 1000
2'
=2000
=5000
5'
-s
-s + c
-s + d
-2s+b + c
-5s + a + b +
2c
d.
We
In order
weight,
it
is
an accurate gramme
The
calculation is
38
DENSITY.
for.
it is
13.
By
its
mass
see Tables 1
to that of
weights in vacuo.
If the metre
or,
cm.,
kgr.
call
In this
homogeneous bodies,
and mm., gr.
case, mgr.
it
in the case of
and
we may
to
each
other.
By
760 mm.
of mercury.
is
it
has at
0,
39
DENSITY.
air of the
14
(1.)
in a graduated vessel,
always reading
To avoid par-
made with a
telescope
sliding
small tube
tain,
is
glass plate, a
known volume
quicksilver.
is,
of
according to
(2.)
quantity
vessel
w
(3.)
in the liquid,
the liquid to be
in,
that in water
lo,
we have agam
l\
= -.
40
DENSITY.
Mohr's balance
is
of
necessary to
are
must be
is
highest accuracy
not required.
is
glass weight.
accuracy
its
related as
be of equal intervals
10
100
(1)
(2)
the
must
divisions
(3) the
temperature
temperature in Table
results
(4.)
to
by the
division
the
i.e.
For
Areometers should
the eye being level with the sur-
when
that
it
fluid,
appears as a
line.
floated in water of 4, or at
2.
at 1
in water of temperature
scale
The mea-
is
put into
substances
water,
This
it.
in
small
some other
method
pieces.
If
is
Tor
may
specially
applicable to
substances
soluble
in
petroleum, or asaturated
be used.
on
A= ~
w
it
lose,
when
41
DENSITY.
The body
is
usually
hung
The weight
balance by a thread or wire as thin as possible.
of the wire is previously determined, and allowed for in the
calculation, in a
manner
The
easily seen.
loss of
weight of
is
to be subtracted
which
vessel of water
weight determined
when
the body
is
suspended in it by a
is equal to the
This increase
air
and in
water
is
spiral wire (piano wire) with two pans hung one above
the other, one always immersed in a vessel of water, is very
convenient for determining densities, especially of small
bodies
{Jolly).
We
bring a
parallax.
If the
into water
The
it is
weighed in
result, calculated as
this density.
TEMPERATURE OF OBSERVATIONS WITH
42
When
the body
is specifically
it
must
allowed to ascend.
(3.)
The weight
of the
to that of
weigh
when
when
the body
w = P-\-m-P'.
if
iiv
This method
is
be used.
As
to the correc-
14.
One
is
of the
Whenever only
it is the
then requires great care on
account of the expansion of water with the temperature.
it
flask
would contain
at
any
of water at
Let us
call
another temperature
t' ,
Q',p'.
These
last
quantities are to
be calculated.
P =P
we have
If
(2.)
know
7j OT
This
Q).
is
of the glass.
(t'-t)
(Q'
43
may
coefficient of cubical
we
+ 3/3
expansion
We
have therefore
/ =2)
{1
3/3 {f
i)}
~=p'+p
-t)^Q'-
[3/3 (f
Q].
(3.)
we should be
solids, since
by not apply-
to that of the
ficient
tv
The
= m + P~P' + {P-
^)
[Q'-Q+
body
A = -{Q-X) +
w
is
3/3 {f
/)].
then (15)
X.
In this formula
m
P
with water ;
T = the weight of the empty
filled
up
be approximate).
t,
/',
at the
Q'
Proof.
It
of the water at
and
t',
p ^p
{\
that, if j?
3(3 (t
15).
/')}
This expression
THE PYKNOMETEK AND IMMEKSED WEIGHT.
44
formula 8
(p.
11)
Q'_ i+(g'-i) _
Q
By formula
p'=p
[1
7, therefore,
3/3 {f
l+(g- l)-l+(^
-t)
+ Q'-Q\=p^p
[3/3 {f
-t)
Q'- Q\
"tt,
P + (P-7r)[33(r-0 +
e'-(>].
But when the body, of the weight m, has been introduced into
the vessel, the weight w of water has overflowed, and the whole
now weighs P'. Obviously therefore
P'
+ t^ = p +
(P -
^) [3/3 (f -t)
Q'
- Q]
+ m,
WEIGHT IN VACUO.
Density.
15.
Water
The methods
under 2 and
for
at 4 and in vacuo.
3,
We
must
45
first
is
applied accord-
is
and therefore
The true density Q is found from
has not the density 1.
the temperature by the help of Table 4 in the Appendix. In
4,
ings in vacuo.
For
mostly enough to take the
0"0012, for the error thus introduced will
mean value
\=
It is
The neglect
1.
may
affect the
we always
of
We
will call
As
w we may
(1.)
body
is
With
therefore have
solids,
weighed in water
after the
With
when
fluids,
method
when
the
of Archimedes,
is
used.
REDUCTION TO WEIGHT IN VACUO.
46
air, is
is
= 21)
besides,
the
may
If,
by temperature be
w+
If the
body, solid or
fluid,
air
/,
three cases.
of water at 4
true density
But
since
would weigh
of the
is
body
is
=w+1
the displaced
=X
A,'
the
the volume of
In
or
= wX
Q-x'
air,
calling its
A = -(Q- ?.) +
w
Example.
Suppose
47
>..
mgr.
m = 24312
in air
in
water at 19-2
= 21916
The uncorrected
m
We obtain the corrected
2396
be
24312
= 10-147.
2396
w
Table
w=
value, taking
Q = 0-99843
A =10-147 (0-99843-0-0012) +
for 19 '2,
from
0-0012 -10-120.
A=
(a
+ x) +
X.
A= 10-147-0-00277 x
By
this
16.
means the
Density.
calculations
10-1
+ 0-0012 = 10-120.
may be performed
mentally.
therefore
A=A
(1+3/30.
48
Most
A =A
V
V.
Density.
17.
air
If this
FE={F+v){H-h),
and therefore
V=v H-li
h
F=vh
When
the body
The
is
placed in
it
the density
is
this difference.
air
is
are
compared with
V and
H, the
Any
by neighbouring
experiment.
bodies, etc.,
18.
49
etc,
760 mm.
the pressure of
(as
of mercury
^"
d=
1
0-003665^
760
0-003665^ and
,=
may
760
7.
Kolilrausch
X^
The temperature
= 0-0012928.
and pressure
density
h
^_ 0-0012928
"1 + 0-003665^ "760'
Table 6
is
of reduction.
The density
the air be
of other gases at h
is
known
must be subtracted
2>e
(28),
e,
the air
may
be considered to
DENSITY OF A VAPOUR OR GAS.
50
This
be on the average half saturated with aqueous vapour.
assumption is very nearly made, at least for ordinary temperatures, by taking for h the undiminished height of the barometer, but as the factor of
t,
19.
The density
1 per
GtAS.
compared
same temperature
and pressure.
The vapour-density of a chemical compound of known
composition is calculated by dividing its atomic weight by
Thus water { = 11^0) has the atomic weight 18 its
2 8 '8 8.
;
vapour-density therefore
is
^^ =0-623.
28-88
A.
A
glass
glass balloon of
from
it,
-g-
to
^^
litre
capacity, with a
neck of
which has been drawn out into a j)oint of about 1 mm.
diameter, is weighed
then a few grammes of the fluid, the
vapour-density of which is to be determined, are sucked up
into the slightly warmed balloon, which is next put, with a
thermometer close to it, into a bath of some liquid, so that
the point projects, and heat is applied until the fluid in the
balloon boils.
Wlien this is turned into vapour, the heat
must be raised at least 10 above the boiling-point, and
;
is
51
is held
has been removed by boil-
air
is
been broken
off,
air.)
We
(1.)
(2-)
call
711,
'>n'
(4.)
31
t and
(5.)
t'
(3.)
(6.)
I.
full
of air
vapour;
,,
water or mercury
jj
b the temperature of the vapour, and the height of
the barometer at the moment of sealing.
d=
If
when
^'-^
M-m
X'
The
l\
J
^
b
vapour-density
-1-0-003665^''
is
0'003665^
^,
must be written
instead of y.
m'
Al
-m -t-A.
-m
is
to be
DETEEMINATION OF
52
air at the
temperature
\M- m
air for
We
th.
find then
J X
^V
X~b
X'
Accurate Formula.
II.
pansion of the
+
+
0-003665^
0-003665^"
Eegard
water.)
We
(7.)
Q = the
(8.)
3/3
(1) to (6)
= the
coefficient of cubical
4).
have
-m
Q-X'
,,
,.
.,
S'
+
+
0-003665^
0-003665^
- m
From the apparent weight of the water
Proof.
(volume V), the weight reduced to vacuo is obtained by adding
X', the weight of the displaced air.
The water has the density
Q, therefore the weight of water at 4, which fills the balloon, that
is,
m
7V=M
a X
latter, is
-^j
from which
Therefore, as above,
vapour
T^
JJ
=m
-m+
Tr,
y X
we
find
M -m
-m -m + -^ X-;
.,
(J
VAPOUE-DENSITY (dUMAS),
53
^=1^(1 + 3/3(^-0}.
From which we find the density
water (formula 4, p. 11)
The vapour-density
is
d,
compared with
air of the
density
>.
for
h,
t,
therefore
III.
It frequently
may
be put.
air is
not
which
known by
is
when
pletely full
the point
The
from
1.
M determined.
(9.)
The weight
= if'.
is
(m'-m)$+M'-m'
"
(^_
^^)
^
^
&
0-003665^'
b'
1+
0-003665^
-r
_
!^
_
/'
j^^,^
V
Compare E. Kohlrausch's
more
weights
The
and M',
is,
M-3I'
q _ y
.,
',
it
was
54
VAPOUE-DENSITY (dUMAS).
M-M'
^^_
Q--k
The expression
for
mixture
volume
we
call
of the
'
+
+
0-003665
d calculated above
v of air,
is
V -v
and
Vd^v +
0-003665T7''
d^^
{V-v)d^,
from which
,
_Vd-v d-~
V
V
Here
if
v_
for
(7
we
M-M
V M-m
in
0-003665.
by 11, and
_oo(,
^^
1-0-003665.^'^^
for
.n-.
^'^'
formulse
(p.
Example.
above, in order to
lead,
and we
average
will take
ratio.
Let the data given by observation be (the weights being expressed in grammes)
m = 68-4522
m'
= 6 8 -7 8 6 3
(air)
M= 293-91
(full of
(vapour)
M'= 291*73
water)
= 745-6 mm.
= 742-2 mm.
t
t'
=
=
We
find (18)
?v'
= 0-0011818
X'=:
The
(neglecting
0-0011762 (regarding
e)
f).
of
e, is
r;
55
From
we
may
272-8
use
++
li'A-ti
i!'
msteadof^_^^.^^3gg^^.
%
By
B.
A small quantity of
is to
be determined
is
or vapour bath
{e.g.
The
now
is
is
evaporated.
If
now we
call
in the bath
56
d=
0-003665
in
760
b-h
0-001293
or a
t,
and
b~h-e.
height of barometer
From
C.
Chem.
Ges., xi.
2253).
shown
in the cut, is
^m
similar
lead,
liquid,
etc.,
to
or
in
When
stant
that
is,
when
is
con-
air expelled
When
by the evaporation
of the substance.
is
consider-
is
(Long con-
The volume
Calling
of air
is
now
read
m, the
V, the
t, the
5", the
=5
^^
The vapour
mm. mercury
is
1+0-004^ ^a^^r.^ m
760
= ^^'^O" S,('
0^001293
expels a volume of
57
same volume
air,
+ 00)-
as the vapour.
Consequently
x 760
above expression.
The factor 0'004 is taken instead of the coefficient of expansion 0*003665 to allow for the moisture of the
'
_^
air.
The pressure
is
is
is two-thirds saturated,
completely so.
h,
air,
Therefore
13-6
If,
plunged into the water, so that the inner and outer water
surfaces are at the same level,
equals simply the baro-
metric pressure
l.
1+0-003665^
where
e is
587800
v'
+ 1-^0-003665^,
He
58
t'
19 a.
A.
By
Weighing.
melted on,
is
not dried),
[m).
As
and
formula
A
gas
h'
The density
gas.
is
of the gas
is
or
II.,
without influence
if
it
is
left
when
filling v/itli
unaltered in
all
the
weighings.
By
B.
The
If,
of gas be
of
measured volume
an equal volume of
air,
of
ATMOSPHERIC PEESSUEE.
59
when
The
188.)
20.
importance.
to several millimetres.
of a
Therefore,
if I
the temperature
t,
value
its
&
h,
reduced to
= /-0-000181.Z./.
member
mean
tracting 0"135 .t
(2.)
On
off at
No. 2)
0, is (4,
value,
in tlie correction
mm.
scale,
the length
normal temperature
/3
t^,
by the addition
of /3 (t-
f^)
I,
where
of the scale
(0-000019
as is usually the
case,
for brass,
O'OOOOOS
for glass).
0,
If,
the
becomes-
5- /- (0-000181
The
correction
amounts
-/3)
It.
therefore,
- 0-0001 G2 J.t;
- 0-000173 I t
.
MEASUREMENT OF HEIGHTS
60
may
be found in
Table 11.
(3.)
depression,
vapour
At high temperatures
occasions
a slight
which
depression,
is
corrected
mm.
to the
observed height.
(5.)
By
obtained.
For many purposes, however, the
knowledge of the pressure of the air is desired, and in this
case it must be remembered that the pressure of the air is
proportional to the height of the barometer, only under the
barometer
is
As
g^, is
is
found at
^=
We
must
barometer
becomes of
g,
cos
21.
we
If
at the height
2p - 0-0000002
by this expression,
any importance only
at
IT.
height of the
which the
of
same
and
we have
- 0-0026
therefore
tp,
last
member
Hypsometry
if
the
mean height
same
of the
denote by
may
rules.
We
; ;
BY THE BAROMETER.
h^
and
61
if
and
stations
t-^
and
^
= the mean
places,
therefore
It is usually
I.
= 18420
=^
('^o
two
^i)-
reckoned that
met.
{log.
b^-iog. bj (1
0-0039
t),
= 16000
met.
t-
^i
(1
II.
+ 0-0039
t).
the latitude,
H the
mean
metres.
Then
h
= 18420
met.
(log.
b^-log.
COS. 2<p
b^) (1
0-0000002Zr).
Cq
and
and
e^,
for shortness
MEASUKEMENT OF HEIGHTS BY THE BAKOMETEE.
62
and
A= 18405
met.
2p
COS.
The logarithms
(1 + 0-0039 t)
0-0000002if + f h).
h^-log. h^
{log.
(\
+0-0026
common
Briggs's
logarithms.
sure
corresponds to -^g
of a
greatest care,
degree,
must be employed
mination (22)
we wish
if
it
to arrive
result.
Proof of
air (18
the hypsometric
formula.
The density of atmospheric
height H, with the height of
<p, the
0-0012928
b-p
l+af
760
,,
^
rrx
^
Now
the density of mercury at 0 is 13-596 ; it follows, if the indH diminish the height of the barometer b by dh
dH and db are the heights of the columns of air and mercury
crease of height
(i.e.
respectively
which are in
equilibrio)
= 0-0012928
cib
13-596.760
Here, besides
to an
b,
unknown
,,
(b
^
^^-S-eH.rr
^e)
dH.
^
l+at
'
we have
law.
and put c in a constant ratio to the height of the baroIf, then, we calculate out the numerical factor,
meter, e = kb.
and consider the small quantities ^-, S, and e//, according to p.
10, as corrections, Ave may write
value,
-7993000
(1
+ at) (1+8 +
5^
on the left-hand
side,
7993000
(1
at)
{1+8 + k)
h^
{log.
iS
U.+H
2
as a correction,
E^-H^^h=
184:05000
= f-H"
log.
!>;)
{l-.^Il),
iH,-H)
G3
we
mm.
log... h,
and consider-
obtain
{log.
h^-log. k) (1
at)
{l+S + eE+k).
The approximation formulae for unknown humidity are got
by assuming the air half saturated, and neglecting the influence
of the aqueous vapour on the density and the coeflficient of
expansion.
From
altitudes is
We may
log.
^"
= 8000
7iaf. log.
further write
nat tog.
nat.
loa-'
= nat.
nat
loa
tog.
^^
^ ( ^o
^^^
+ ^) + H^q-^) ,
_
^ ^^^ _ ^^^-^^
.a.%(l + 2^^^)
after formula 8, p. 11.
nat.
log,
We
the
is
small,
formula immediately
follows.
22.
To determine
plunged into melting
snow or clean broken ice. The point to which the column
of mercury reaches corresponds to the temperature 0.
The column of mercury should be almost entirely
covered by the
ice.
is
64
The warmer the surrounding air, the more caremust these precautions be observed.
For the determination of the boiling-point i.e. the
division which corresponds to 100
the thermometer is
placed in the steam of water which is boiling vigorously in
a vessel either of metal, or of glass with some pieces of
metal in it.
The temperature of the steam is found from
the pressure under which the water boils
i.e.
from the
purpose.
fully
Table 10.
Without
by
for
may
the aid of
be deter-
The bulb
is
reading off
is
The thermometer
CALIBEATION OF A THEEMOMETEE.
is
65
column.
mm.
99-47.
Calibeatiox of a Theemometee.
23.
From
We
and a
are to
linear
tem-
by which the
article),
to
the freez-
and of which
we must
For
this
rest, is
made use
of.
Then
or the
66
CALIBKATION OF
mometer
upright, to
make
patience.
at the
opening of the
tube.
is made to run back to the rest of the merand the position of its upper end is observed at the instant of meeting.
The little bubble of air remains adhering
to the glass at the point of the stem where the junction took
place.
The thermometer is now cooled ^ degrees, and again
reversed and shaken, when a thread of the desired length is
separated.
it is
united to the
rately of
any length
For very
so that, in
such a case we must make use, as shown below, of combined observations with threads of different lengths.
nearly on
the
division,
it is
sufficient to place
of a
degree at both ends of the thread.
Since the thread of mercury and the graduation are not
in the same plane, we must avoid parallax when reading off.
It is simplest to lay the
thermometer upon a piece of lookand place the eye so that its image coincides with
the division to be read
or a lens is fixed steadily, and the
thermometer is pushed along parallel to itself under it.
ing-glass,
A THERMOMETER.
The
accuracy
greatest
secured
is
67
telescope.
and
Ohservation
many
executed in
Calculation.
ways.
The
cated calculations.
by making the
freezing
made
and
let
n
where n
a whole number.
divisions
+ 8^
+ 8^
Let
8,^
have
it
to
a,
,,
a to 2a,
(w l)atolOO.
been
further
determined
(see
previous
article)
The
quantities B^ B^
fore small
tions,
as well as
j^^
and
then,
we
+^^
^_ Po-P. + ^ + ^+'-'
^
pi, are
and may be
If,
-hi;,.
therefrac-
CALIBRATION OF
68
is
Correction.
Division.
-Po
a-p-\
2a-p-8-8^
2a
map^ 8^ 8^
ma
Or
(m
1)
ma
being A,^,
if
that for
a be ^^-i
A =
Aj_i
+ a
S,ft
The values under the heading " Correction " are therefore those numbers which must be added to, or, when negasubtracted from the corresponding reading, in order to
tive,
thermometer.
interpolated in
is
perature
'
-3
'
'
'
=za
a (see above).
from
and
a to 2a
2
finally,
a+ad^-^
a+ad^,
A THEEMOMETER.
from division
69
Temperature
increase.
to a
to 2a
2a
ma
to
+ 2a-V-S
ma +
7na
8^
S,,
The expressions to the right of the stroke would be the thermometer corrections, if the division
also meant the temperature
0.
p^
corresponds to
this,
mercury
is
A thermometer graduated
of about 50 long
from
to the boiling-point of
Here, therefore, n
p^
which
=
50
is
2.
enough
thread
0-0 to
50-0
100-1
149-8
200-4
50-9
100-4
150-3
199-8
250-0
8^= +0-9
K=
+0-4
8;= 4-0-2
8^= 0-0
85= -0-4,
etc.
p,= + 0-Q,2\=-0-3.
Therefore
^^ Pu-Pi + 8^ +
The
table of corrections
8.2
is
^ +0-6 +
0-3
The correspondence
0-9
0-4
therefore
Division.
50
100
150
200
250
Correction.
-0-6
1-1-0-6-0-9
= -0-6
= -0-4
2-2-0-6-0-9-0-4
= +0-3
3-3-0-6-0-9-0-4--0-2- +1-2
= + 2-3
+ 1-2 + 1-1-0-0
+ 2-3 + 1-1 +
0-4
= +3-8,
etc
CALIBRATION OF
70
For
is interpolated according to the ordinary rules.
example, to the reading 167-3, the temperature 167'3 + 1-6 =
16 8 "9 would correspond.
division
We
we wish
to
We
calibrate.
by which
several threads,
By one
the lengths of which are different multiples of a.
thread about ka in length we can compare the capacity of the
and a with that between
tube between the scale-divisions
ha and {k
1) a, and so on, by bringing the thread first be-
and ka, and then between a and (Z; -|- 1) a; for the
tween
volume which is left empty by moving the thread is equal to
the space
that which is freshly occupied at the other end
For example,
included in both cases being of no influence.
to 20
a thread of say 40 long can be used to compare
;
with 40 to 60.
But in order
ment,
it
is
several threads.
Two
first
3a
we can
reduce
Further,
number
of these
It is better, therefore, to
by another auxiliary
thread.
many
diminish the
The plan
of
A THERMOMETEE.
In
order,
may
now, that we
p.
67
7l
be able to
make
use of the
will
make
Example.
A thermometer
degrees from
therefore
(p.
to
67),
^3=0.
the column of about 40 in two positions occupy the
+ 0-3 to 40-0 and 207 to 60-0. The column
would therefore have extended from + 0'3 to 20"7 ; therefore,
Now,
let
spaces from
a,
= +
0-4.
between
in terms of
been compared
to F.
it
i^
it
and 60 and
to 20, and,
Avith
40
to 60,
therefore
to
and 20 to 79-6;
20 = 60*2 to 79-6.
to
20 by 0-4 ;
it
would therefore
therefore 8^=
0'2.
=+0-3.
CALIBRATION OF A THERMOMETER.
72
It has also
is
at
0"1,
and 100"
at lOO'S
therefore
^,^
= +0-1
^^
= +0-8.
and 100
0-1
-0-8 +
0-4
0-3
0-0
-0-2 -0-7
And
is
is
n=
5.
^,
U'lo.
Correction.
Division.
-0-1
-0-10-0-18-0-4=-0-68
-0-68-0-18-0-3= -1-16
20
40
60
80
100
The
last
number
is
-M6-0-18+0-0=
-1-34
for a
At high temperatures
so
the comparison
may
easily be
inexact.
(See
and 100
at
is
j9j^,
arbitrary.
the reading
If the temperature
perature
100
for high
temperatures in
73
AIK THEEMOMETER.
24.
The
filling.
AiE Thermometer.
scientific definition
of temperature rests
{e.g.
dry
for
is
upon the
air)
expands, at con-
rise
of
temperature.
each degree of
rise of
temperature 0"003665 of
its
pressure
at 0.
cury.
By
the
surface of the
raising
or
mercury in
lowering of
II,
which
is
the
joined
^^
in I observed.
negative,
when
We
will
call
the surface in
h^
II
-\-
is
h^
= ir^, where
the lower.
h^ is
All the
heights b and h
If,
to the
b
-\-
=
0-003C65
and h be observed,
H-S^ir
calling
AIR THERMOMETEE.
74
Where
venient formula
^
to the
^-^0
.
It is here
up
= 275
we must add
the value of
to
t,
correction
where
-2;
H\+ 0-003665
t'
to the mark,
v'
The
ratio
is
.
If
P the
_P -p
p
a,
by
V
d^Hj
at the second
by
d^r v{\^ m)
760
\+
by
-\-
dividing
_^n
at
at
we
at'\'
get
at!
AIR THEEMOMETEE.
or separating
L
From
75
o^_\
at'^
o'
1+ at J
above by put-
v'
ting
hand
-=
0.
left-
v'
- we may
as
was
we
S^H,
neglect the
;
and
get
to be proved.
perature
may
vj
or
up
to
= v^
be expressed thus
(1
0-00017905^
an expression which
this,
0-0000000252f),
by
log. Vt
ing to
is
log.
?;
0-000078^,
common
Accord-
mercurial thermo-
meter, when they have been corrected after 22 and 23, are
between 0 and 100 lower; above 100, on the contrary,
higher than those of an air thermometer, although, on
to
0"5
;
On
76
thermometer
may
be taken as about
for reading
40
20
80
60
150
100
200
250
300
correction
0-0
0-2
If the
0-3
0-3
0-2
of the
difference
observed to be
perature
4-
A we may
,
(Bosscha, Fogg.
0-0
two
50
is
Ann.
2500
25.
Jut., 550), as
^(100-0-
In experiments where the great mass or the circumferthermometer prevents its use, the
electromotive force, developed at the point of contact of
two metals (bismuth
antimony
iron
german- silver
platinum
iron) by difference of temperature, may often be
made use of. Two wires of equal length (e.g. iron and
german-silver) are soldered together at one end, and at the
other to copper wires.
If the former soldering be placed at
the point of which the temperature is to be measured, and
the other two kept at a known temperature (say by ice at
0), an electromotive force results.
This is measured by
ence of a mercurial
connecting the ends of the copper wires with a galvanometer and observing the deflection.
For small differences of temperature (up to about 20)
the current strength may be taken as proportional to the
difference of temperature.
COEFFICIENT OF EXPANSION.
For greater
multiplier
is
differences, or
structed empirically
known
certain
use
for
is
from the
calculated
when
77
deflections,
table
by observing the
From
temperatures.
interpolated
by
either
con-
is
deflections for
this
table
calculation
|li
or
graphically.
following
wires,
can be placed.
26.
The
(yS) is
the increase of
by a
is
rise of
temperature of
1.
By Measuring
/,
the Length.
and
if it
increase
expansion
A,
in length
coefficient
the example in
3).
of
yS
r,
(see also
delicate
and
a through which it is turned be measured,
\ = r sin a, where r = the distance of the point of contact
from the axis on which the arm turns, and where also it is
assumed that at one of the temperatures the lever arm is
means
the
of measuring them.
angle
COEFFICIENT OF EXPANSION.
78
We
assume
upon the
scale
is
seen in the
telescope, and that the distance between the scale and the
image
motion of the
to
scale-divisions,
we may put
case
2 sin
X=
.
for the
a process of weighing.
fill
the bulb,
By
it.
is
small
knowledge of
be obtained by
bulb with a drawn-out point is
;
this can
it is first
This
If the
Wci(jliing.
warmed and
we
when a
filled
B.
weighed,
Since
for tan 2 a,
II.
Very
a = 4 tan
is
To
cools, a
quantity
is
drawn up
is
completely
full
warmed
down to the
Then the
coefficient
of expansion
(cubical)
is
calculated
thus
3/3
= 0-0001815
^- -^^p^
Po
Poih-K)
specific
BOILING-POINT OF A FLUID.
Expansion of Liquids.
III.
(1.)
stopper,
perature
ature
if
glass
when
t
vessel with
entirely
filled,
the weight
79
p\
2^
If 3/3
and
is
and
mean
cubic coefficient
is
t'
P' {i'-t}'
two
and p and p^ are the respective losses
of weight, the formula is the same as under 1.
(3.) A glass bulb and narrow divided tube (Hke a thermometer) is filled up to the tube and the position of the
liquid observed at the temperatures t and t\ If the observed
volumes are v and / the mean coefficient of expansion is
(2.)
different temperatures,
,v'
The bulb
is
v'
f-t
calibrated with
a mercury thread,
which
is
313
weighed.
It is still simpler to
27.
BOILING-POINT OF A FLUID.
The
0-00016
a {t-t').
HYGKOMETKY.
80
O'OOOIG
is tlie
between the
difference
glass, or
coefficients of cubical
As the mean temperature t' of the exterior part of the mercury column is hard to determine, it is taken, in default of anything better, from the reading of a second thermometer, the bulb
of which is placed in contact with the stem of the thermometer
used in the determination, at about the middle of the exterior
part.
In long and massive thermometers, the air temperature
may be taken for t\ and say 0'00012 written for O'OOOIG.
(B.) The boiling-point must be reduced to 760 mm.
from the actual height of the barometer h at the time of
observation.
It is indeed only very rarely that the rise of
is
mm.
increase of pressure
a];)proximately
by adding
0-0375
into
the correction
to the observed
.
may
be applied
temperature
(760-&).
The thermometer must not dip into the liquid, but only
the steam.
To make the boiling regular, pieces of
platinum
28.
foil
Am
cubic metre of
air,
expressed in grammes.
This
air.
is
We
HYGROMETllY.
(2.)
The
81
air, to
amount of
calculating
it
as
f
;^_
= 0-943
+ 0-0036650
(1
"^^=^^^^
so that the determination of
the calculation
of
all
the
/,
1+0-003665^ /
t,
and either
quantities,
{e
measured in
millimetres of mercury.)
Gay
0-693
1
I.
1293
+ 0-003665^
_^ ^^'
760
1-0606
^
1
0-003665/'
i.e.
the temperature
t,
at
which the
In
with vapour
is determined directly.
Table 13 we then find for any value of r between- 10 and
corresponding quantity of vapour / in a cubic
-f- 30, the
air is saturated
metre of
air,
by 1000000, and
vapour saturated at r; and this is,
fore
neidrbourhood of the instrument is cooled, and thereThe contained water as taken from the
denser.
made
table for t
is
HYGROMETRY.
82
In
273T7'
gas,
-n
be multiplied by
^i
''S'''^'' ^^^
"^^'''^ '
temperature
air.
is
made
tlie
by the evaporation of
to sink
deposited water
observed.
is
Then the evaporation of the ether is interrupted, the temperature rises, and the reading is taken at which the deposit
After some preliminary trials it is easy
begins to disappear.
to bring the temperatures of the appearance and disappearance of the dew within a small fraction of a degree of each
other.
The mean of the two is then the dew-point r of the
To attain the greatest possible accuracy, Eegnault preair.
scribes such a regulation of the flow of
By Augustes Fsycliroimtcr
Leslie's]
rapidity
England usually
called
rapidity, again, is
tlie
[in
air is
bulb of which
is
kept wet.
If then
from Table 13 ;
the height of the barometer in
t',
as taken
mm.
is
nnila
e
Or when
t'
is
= e'- 0-00080
below freezing-point
h
c
{t-f).
= c' - 0-000G9
Z'
(;!
f).
HYGROMETKY.
When
83
may
(water con-
be found by the
for-
mula on p. 81.
The above constants
O'O
1 2.
best in observations in a
of the constant
use for h a
If psychrometer determinations be
made, say in the course of determining a vapour-density, in
a moderately large, closed balance-room, the tension c will
be found with sufficient accuracy as c = c'- 0"8 {t-t').
corresponding
to
t'.
ExavijjJe.
It has been found that t= 19'50, f = 13*42, the
height of the barometer i = 739 mm.
find in Table 13 for t',
e'= 11-44 mm.
From this we must take 0-00080 x 739 x 6-08
= 3-59 mm. ; therefore the tension of the water vapour e = 7-85
We
mm.
From
this the
temperature 19-5
''
-r.
Kec;nault
'^^
found, according to
1-060.7-85
^
+0-003665 19-5
water contained in
is
g
cb.m.
accurate formula
=e
0-4805 {t-t')
^
6
be
p. 81, to
r.
(or
below treez-
SPECIFIC HEAT.
84
and determining
aspirator,
tlie
The
scale
must
be graduated empirically.
29.
The unit
Method by
which
The
called
is
its
(Table 14).
Strictly
is
not a constant
This
is
with water,
temperature
for
as
I.
The body
Solid Bodies.
weighed,
is
warmed
to a given temperature,
it
loss of
tem-
common
them both.
Then if
^
larger
corrections than
considerably.
that of Regnault.
is
ii.
given.
318,
METHOD BY MIXTURE.
85
Tthe
- the
initial
body
of the
p_ni
~"m'
For
{^
CM (Tr),
f) is
is
T-t'
that which
The
vessel is
thin silver).
(Table 14),
made
y be
If
fi
copper-gilt or
(e.g.
The
from ^ to t will be fiy (r-t).
which raises the temperature 1, is called
the equivalent in water of the vessel.
The equivalent weight
For
of the thermometer must be determined by experiment.
this purpose it is heated, sa,y by plunging it into heated mercury, about 30, and then quickly transferred to a weighed
quantity of water, and the rise of temperature produced is obnecessary to heat
quantity of heat
it
fxy,
This multiplied
loss of
temperature
(see above) is
-1-
O'OOOll
-h t).
filling
it.
by
0-00011
{t
-\-
t)
of the
SPECIFIC HEAT.
86
much below
may
or, if
it.
is
The
room
it
tem-
may be
sufficient to fulfil
this
it
In order, besides,
that
as the final
of the temperature
rise
condition approxi-
The time
also
which
in the calculations in a
manner
which
is
included
easily determined.
Further,
made
of polished
Physik,
iii.
396.
p.
known
taken of
specific heat,
pentine),
Example.
parts were
Table 14
as above,
{e.g.
oil
of tur-
must be multi-
Both
stirrer.
and Aveighed together, /a = 1 9 grms.
heat of brass is 7 = 0-094 ; the equivalent therefore
(1.)
made
of brass
The specific
is /i7=19 X 0-094=
1-8 g.
87
METHOD BY MIXTUEE.
warmed
The equivalent
rose to 17'10.
amounts
to
17-10-16-25
20
The equivalent
6 ^
g.
45-17-1
is
therefore
2-4 g.
(3.)
g.
il/=48-3
g.
therefore
C=(l+0-O00n
X27-6).
II.
The
as
16-74-11-05
76-4
t^ 11'05
r=16"74
^^
, ,
^^^^--j = 0-1129.
Liquids.
above described,
it plunged into a water-calorimeter.
if it
and with
T= 9G-7
is
known
is filled
with
and
The body must be a good
as above described.
plunged into
it
conductor,
If a sufficient
with fragments of
glass or copper.
If
M,
T,
C be
heated body
= the
= the
m = the
tv = the
initial
final
is
88
SPECIFIC HEAT.
It
is
mercury in the
apparatus
and
is
at the
moment when
It is then allowed to
mark
is plunged
and when the
mercury reaches the lower mark the globe is removed a,nd
the temperature again observed (Andrews
Pfaundler).
Let m, w, t, T have the same signification as before and
if a parallel experiment performed with a quantity m' of
water gave the initial and final temperatures t' and r', we
have at once
cool,
The
liquid
the
is
kept
is
reached
stirred,
^ m'
30.
[1
-1-
0-00011
{f
Specific Heat.
-f-
t')]
+w
r'-t'
Method by
_w
Cooling.
A
tive
thermometer
Solid bodies
may
placed,
is
be tightly
is
is
filled
jammed down.
closed with a
lid.
It is
When
com-
then warmed
ice.
may be observed.
Let there be, then, two sets of observations with the
vessel fiUed with two different substances.
We will call
in the air in a single closed metallic vessel
METHODS BY MELTING
M the quantities
89
ICE.
and
a and
c
used to
fill
the vessel
85);
6
then
:=i[(jfa + .)^-,].
If,
therefore,
we know C
_ mc + w
e.g.
by using water
C= 1, we
can
must be taken
make
to elapse after
to observe.
It will
warming the
always be best
seconds.
Then a curve
is
constructed from
times which correspond to equal initial and final temperatures (or excess of temperature over that of the surrounding
bodies).
a large
afterwards taken.
first
when
the
31.
Specific Heat.
The body,
Methods by Melting
Ice.
bunsen's ice-calokimetek.
90
giving up
If,
by
cific
this
its
is
_ 71/79-4
The
units of heat to
avoided by surrounding
is
In
of ice melted
is
which
is
experienced
c.c,
cxli. p. 1
\^Phil.
when water
If a
mixture of
ice
is
_v_
S75-4:
m'
'
melting
79-4
cemented on
and d are
filled
up
to
c.c.
875
c,
made
of
an iron piece
the dotted line with
;
is
91
bunsen's ice-calorimeter.
Above
boiled mercury.
by
air
boiling, in
When
ment
is
fixed
by d
in a holder,
and
calibrated
the
tube
pressed
scale-
through
mercury
stands
along
far
When
sufficiently
the
divisions.
up to a with w^ater
some other fluid which does
not dissolve the body to be
filled
or
Fig. 5.
which contains a
little
of
some
soft substance to
prevent
The mercury in
If the movement
s sinks, and finally becomes stationary.
of the mercury amount to p scale -divisions, and if the
breakage, and a cork
is
value of 1 division be
<p,
We
then inserted.
v=p(p.
grammes, of a
by determining the weight,
(p
thread of a mercury which occupies 7i divisions. If t be the
temperature at the time when this measurement is made
get
/u,
_ /x
~
(1
+ 0-00018
t)
^'^'
13-59671
The heat-values of the scale may also be determined empirically by employing a body of known specific heat in
the calorimeter.
Slight impurities of the
calorimeter
is
surrounded
snow
or
ice
The
alter
rate of change
92
HEAT-CONDUCTING POWEE.
32.
TWO EoDS
(Despretz).
Let us
call
conductivities h and
The temperature
Proof.
When
is
has become
by conduction
Ijar
93
Avhere a
carried
is
The quantity
of heat
dH
by conduction
is
kci. -
2' if
the end surface, h the conducting power, and q the section, the
same
for
both rods.
If
we put
j-
= a^,
a? is a quantity inversely
perature will be
The complete
is
t.^,
ca^
-I-
a^
= J3 ^ 2n
(see above), or
h
n
We
expression
log.
(n
reciprocal
of
the
Wiedemann and
33.
\/n^ ~~
square
)>
/,
a proportional to the
of this
magnitude.
Compare
also
support,
sufficient to
An
keep
it
stretched
additional weight
is
its
length
now put on
which
it
causes
is
then measured.
measured.
and
Calling
94
L, the length ;
P, the additional load ;
I, the increase of length caused
Q, the sectional area of the wire
E of
the stretching
The
by
it
is
kg.
distinguished
by the
"^
affix
sq.
mm.
If the upper
is
better to
to
measure
made
as
two
length
The accuracy
creased
if
method
of the
will be
considerably in-
many
loads.
method
(See
of least
The area
of the section
may
l)e
obtained
l>y
when
must be enq)loyed.
measurement
95
length.
Q=
mm.
sq.
section
Q=
\^
= 0-08647
2000.7-575
sq.
^
mm.
By
X 61
= 5-4
different loads
two points
Elongation.
Load.
Length.
kg.
mm.
00
0-1
0-2
0-3
913-80
913-86
913-90
913-98
fo.
Load.
Length.
for 2 kg.
mm.
mm.
kg.
2-0
Ml
2-1
2-2
2-3
914-91
914-85
915-00
915-09
No.
Mean
The elongation hence
is
34.
1-11
1-102
/= 1*102 mm.
1-09
1-10
'^^'^^
1*102 X 0-08647
{vide supra)
-19180
'"
sq.
mm.
A
is
By com-
96
vibration
L
A
pitch,
the time of
Calling
determined.
is
known
tuning-fork of
parison with a
11
18);
the velocity of sound in the substance, in metres,
= in'UA
9810
gravity,
We have u=
A the
and
we have chosen
1:
sq.
mm.
^^ where g = the
mm.
of weight (which
is
we must put
and express
L in
acceleration
the
for
u== 2nL,
Kg.
Proof.
is
of elasticity
metres but
rj
by
Since
as unit
mm.
in
damped.
A wire stretched, and fastened
rubbed in the middle, a rod is clamped by
the middle part, and rubbed on one half.
With a stretched wire, which can be lengthened or
resin, for glass is
at both ends, is
made more
ing
its
exactly
by bring-
and their
it is
Such an
octaves.
it
will
The modulus
vibrations
is
When
of
elasticity
them
make them
true value
is
usually already
deduced from
longitudinal
slight
97
Example.
The above-mentioned iron wire of the length of
1*361 metre, gave the note A^^, which is found by Table 18 to
The
specific gravity
is
^^ 4
^^^^^^^.g^.
9810
sq.
mm.
E'
II.
--
kilometres.
{vide supra)
9810*
In I., instead of a measurement of the section, a simple
weighing of a measured length is all that is required, and II. is
independent of any weighing at all.
From the example, p. 95, the numerical value of the modulus
of elasticity, according to the last definition, will be for an iron
wire, of which 1 mm. weighed 0"655 mg.
^^, =
4 X 1865' X 1361'
PT^T?;
9810
^^^^
=2627
.,
kilometres.
98
ELASTICITY BY BENDING.
35.
I.
is
h, is
P
if
3'
'
rV
is
each other be
/.
weight
is
s',
and we have,
for
s'
/'
ab
'
P = l IIrV
12
s'
94).
is
that on taking
i.e.
rV
ELASTICITY BY BENDING.
99
the rod
is
small.
is
If
now z
be the
positive,
h,
and thickness
+z
and
z,
y^
5;
dz,
seeks therefore to
Ez ^ Mz, and
A lamina
draw
itself
hdz.
breadth
I,
and
is
dz\f
moment P
(I
x),
12 dz-
z\lz
The
elasticity,
exercised
therefore
By
double integration
dx'
"
we
12
_\2
E
P
P_
dh
>'
fix'
fl
-A
^\
where x =
^~E'a%'
Further, that for the same rod, if both ends be left loose, the
weight in the middle produces yV of the deflection follows from
the fact that we may in this case consider the middle fixed, and
P
-
100
weight
vibration,
i.e.
oscillation.
Calling
of suspension.
r its radius in
mm.
mm.
Wire by
of a
Modulus of Torsion
36.
we have
the wire
is
made
2.ZZ
g
(Y
be measured in
by
for the
modulus
mm. and
^=9810
be expressed in seconds,
If the time
becomes
i^= 0-0006405
-^:.
t'r
ME"
we must put K=^ ^, where
,
is
M the
mass in kg.
The modulus of torsion or second modulus of elasticity
F may be conceived as follows Suppose a plate of the
In the plate a line is marked
substance having surface =1.
perpendicular to the surface of the base, which is immovably
fastened, and on the opposite surface a force h, uniformly
distributed over the whole surface, acts in the plane of this
surface.
By this the horizontal layers will be pushed over
each otlier, and the previously normal line will now form
with the normal a small angle S, then F is the relation of
the force k to this angle, and h = FB.
:
ELASTICITY BY OSCILLATION
UNDER TORSION.
101
diameter, as
is
known by
extension
X,
and
be the length, d
produced by the
the ratio of the contraction of
experience.
this diminution,
h
if
we
take
fore in
any case
Fh"
By
-,
- :-
SiS,
If
which
is
u.,
also
then according to
experience
Clebsch,
/i
-,,
there-
<2
-\- [I,
E.
der ElasticUilt,
\.
Compare
(Poisson.
and
Theorie
/--'
= 5, F =^
92).
The moment
concentric tubes.
of rotation exerted
be calculated from F,
if
One
by the
we imagine
If
we now
twist
the wire, so that the lowest section is turned through the angle
into a screw line, which has the in(p, this line will be turned
clination
-j-
to the vertical.
This
is also
we have
its original
2'7rd^.
the
of rotation
length
moment
^ is
P^dp.
Since
I,
and radius
r,
is
moment
2^i^?yj\/g=i^l^%.
With the help of (54) this gives directly the period of oscillation
bearing in mind that if the forces are expressed b}'' weights as
in elasticity, the moment of rotation must be multiplied by
t,
the factor
g.
102
determination of
37.
Figures {Kundt).
(number
The
rod
is
laid horizontal
Fig.
is
is
20 mm.
The tube must be well
movable plug.
by a
and covered
tube, at least
cleaned,
silica,
or sifted cork-dust.
end, E,
6.
On rubbing
One
By
the place
is
easily
latter is
U= 330
Vl 4-0-004^ y metre
of elasticity
103
VELOCITY OF SOUND.
rod.
ture
glass rod
17, a distance
17
900
-
= 4890 metres;
d2"9
^^4890-
2-7
^^^3^
9810
te.
sq.
mm.
We
have
h
5
Sq
t
If
the temperature;
and
stant volume
^r
13-596 c'
2^:^^
_
s
is
+0-003665^
c
^
Q-0Q3665^
c'
-^^=
s^
-101-37
c'^
104
37a.
A Musical Note.
The number
(1.)
of vibrations of a tuning-fork
determined by allowing
smoked
surface
{e.g.
of
known
At
may
be
a curve on a moving
a rotating drum)
ment
to trace
it
by means
of
a light
periodic time
number
By
repeated observations
may
they
together,
If the beats
the higher.
(4.)
stretched
number
m.,
m. weighs ^, gives
of vibrations
measueement of the angle of a crystal.
38.
105
The instrument
is
perpendicular to
window-frame or
We
roof-
will first
assume that the crystal has been already fixed to the axis,
according to the instructions given on the next page, so
that the edge of the crystal over which the angle is to be
measured lies in the axis, and is parallel to it.
Holding,
now, the eye close to the crystal, the observer turns the
axis until the image of the upper mark, as seen in one of
the crystal- faces, coincides with a lower horizontal mark, U,
seen directly.
The edge of the floor or the reflected image
of the upper mark, as seen in a properly inclined mirror
fastened behind the goniometer, may be used for this
purpose.
off
MEASUKEMENT OF THE ANGLE OF A CRYSTAL.
106
number
the index.
therefore
and
first
It
is
been read
off,
we may, in
method
order to
circle
use of
all
have also
the obser-
Adjustment of
of the
make
is
also used in
measuring an angle
Axis of
notation.
{Naumann.)
Fig. 7.
A
ments
is
;
(1.)
is
in
ah
i.e.
in
which turning
its
place
A.
107
(2.)
axis c
is
made
parallel to
no turning of
By
(3.)
and
b,
The
By
face (1)
is
have altered
turning h
by
this
it is
means
to c
turning
is
made
parallel to A.
With
is
chosen, or a
ones.
The
its
face
of the crystal is
is
made
to coin-
On
by
reflection,
compare
also
39, II.
39.
must be focussed on
rays.
(1.)
The
slit
of the instrument
parallel
For
this
purpose the
MEASUEEMENT OF
108
focussed clearly by
The telescope is then
and drawn out so that the
the
lens
first
of
the
first
eye-piece.
that
is,
If the
own image
drawn out
can be
be used
Compare
also
No. 7 of this
slit, and
image shows no parallax
then represents an object at an
the slit-tube so
moving
may
in a plane-mirror
other on
cross-threads
directed to the
is
tliat its
It
infinite distance.
(2.)
circle
its axis.
be read at each observation, which need not at all necessarily differ by exactly 180; but to avoid future uncer-
belongs.
telescope
is
perpendicular
to
its
axis
of
rotation,
illu-
A small
minated cross-wires in the ocular are employed.
plane parallel-sided glass plate reflecting from both sides
(silvered,
48)
is
fixed (with
wax
or
gutta-percha) in the
with
its
image
of rotation.
if
the telescope
is
perpendicular to
axis
its
must
succeeds.
till
109
KEFEACTIVE INDEX.
(4.)
180
perpendi-
proved by
after
is
is
when
correspond.
If the mirror itself
(5.)
levelling screws,
it
may,
is
is
little foot
with
parallel with
The image
the telescope.
provided with a
lastly,
of the cross-threads
adjusted
is
repeated
course
it is
90, the
after
is
line
(6.)
parallel
slit
may
may
be
be made
to serve the
directed to the
instrument.
If
faces
is
This face
to
be
then
first
being
left
unaltered during
Plate.
This property
illuminated
may
cross -wires
as
by suitable
must appear
Secondly, when by focussing
follows.
First,
and undistorted.
MEASUEEMENT OF
110
In
it
for
pouring
a hollow prism
into
it
with sides of
the
glass,
light.
Measurement of
I.
(a)
When
the circle
is
the
The prism
movable.
is
is fixed,
and
so that
by moving
this
latter
By means of
upon which it is
footsore ws
placed,
the
of
prism
the
is
levelling -stand
adjusted
with
its
refracting
edge
No.
6.
circle,
slit
or illuminated cross-wires
made
to coincide
the circle
is
of the prism
<p.
Ill
REFRACTIVE INDEX.
When
(h)
the prism
fixed
is
circle.
slit,
it
The
object
the prism
be used
slit
from
so
is
it
that
must be
at
may
accomphsh
this,
fully followed.
size of
If the
it.
fall parallel
on the prism,
To
the preceding directions (1) must be careIt is obvious that the angle of a crystal can
between the
II.
The
slit
and
telescope.
Measurement of
direct adjustment
the
Angle of Deviation.
of the telescope
upon the
slit
be found.
(a) Usually the prism
mum
The
deviation.
is
slit is
and prism, and the latter tvu-ned until the image of the slit
moves to the same side, whether the prism be turned to the
Here the prism has the position of minimum
right or left.
deviation, and it is fixed and the circle read off when the
cross-wires and the image of the slit have been made to
The difference between this position and the
coincide.
direct adjustment
The
angle
refractive
p,
on the
index
calculated
fx
slit
is
by the formula
if
we caU
the
S.
refracting
112
sin
i (8+
sin
(p
(p
tlirough a prism is
produced when the ray makes, within
the prism, equal angles with the two
refracting faces, and therefore also with
the two normals. These latter angles are
Let the angle of inciI f (see Fig. 8).
dence, and therefore of emergence, from
Fig. 8.
The angle
sin I (S
the prism be
of deviation
p)
= sin a = fx
of the
ray
a,
is
therefore sm a
S
= 2a
^,
= /^ sin.
therefore
follows.
(h)
The prism
is
it,
i.e.
so
is
turned
that the
seen directly.
be illuminated.
If
we
B,
p,
(p)
//,=
sin f
The index
of refraction
must
In sunlight, which
upon the
slit
isa
Red.
Yellow.
Green.
Blue.
Violet.
Fig. 9.
through a
flint-glass
prism.
In order to see
and a the
113
must not be
before
is
too narrow,
With
it.
a narrow
slit
Where
line.
A may
be ob-
As mean
To reduce
is
usually taken.
40.
When
medium
of refractive
-^
n- = sm
<p
I.
The body
is
With
the Total-reJIectometer.
filled
I
114
bromnapthalin
as carbon disiilpliide, or
fluid sucli
(Grotli),
petroleum), which
flame.
By
is
and
accommodated to a great
view in the body divided into
circle
of the
divided
circle,
the telescope
is
directed to a well-
ment.
On
reflecting
surface,
other must
Or with the adjusted telescope,
a distant object to one side and in the
level.
is
must appear in
its line
of sght.
reflecting surface
115
phide).
Examination of Crystals.
Double refracting objects in
general give two limits corresponding to the two indices of
Uniaxial crystals are most conveniently examined
on a surface perpendicular to the principal axis (on its recognition, see 46).
In this the two principal indices may
always be measured.
The horizontally polarised ray (that is,
refraction.
when
is
is
If the crystal
is parallel
In
A crystal
surface,
all directions
lateral angle
line of the
If this
be placed horizontally,
we have an
principal plane,
optical elasticity
is
we
placed horizontally.
when an
axis of
direction of the
DETERMINATION OF THE REFRACTIVE INDEX.
116
We may
when
little flask,
sm
(2.)
fluid in the
trough
in this case
<p
may
body.
iv. 1.
II.
Abbe's refractometer
examination of
fluids,
are turned
is
so turned
This limit
is
sought, giving a
still
Then a
As proof
may
known
be employed.
and espe-
DETERMINATION OF THE REFRACTIVE INDEX.
117
Either daylight or lamplight may be employed to illuminate the mirror, which must be adjusted to give as sharp
a limit as possible.
der Brechungsvermdgens,
Jena, 1874.
III.
With
the Spectrometer.
body
in the
form
may
be employed.
allowed to
fall
with homogeneous
light)
slit
The two
(illuminated
2<p apart.
vision be brought
slit
be illumi-
made
to coincide
with any
is
slit
may
By
be
line.
of rotation
tion to
(p,
air,
as
yy-_ _1
sin
<p
plate,
an ande of incidence
<!>,
given by
-r^
-:r.
118
If
SPECTRUM ANALYSIS.
now
to air,
is
<l)
that
The apparatus
p.
375,
Spectrum Analysis.
41.
clviii.
for
slit
Adjustment of
The adjustment
the
Apparatus.
of
oixlei^
is
accom-
of the operations
The
slit
sharp.
The prism must be adjusted to the position of miniTo attain this end, where the prism has
not been fixed in the proper position by the maker, the slit
(2.)
mum
is
deviation.
approximately in
lens
this position.
(3.)
visible.
from
it.
the tube
The
It is illuminated
is
drawn out
images of the
slit
till
The
119
SPECTKUM ANALYSIS.
moving the eye before the eyeshould not be more brightly illuminated
The
piece.
than
scale
is
upon some
and
Bunsen
that adopted by
particular division of the scale
made
by
is
This adjustment
Kirchhoff being the 50th.
then
be
should
turning the tube carrying the slit, which
(4.)
The sodium
line should be
made
to fall
clamped.
Valuation of the
II.
Scale.
In order to know the points of the scale which correspond to the lines of the different chemical elements, their
flames should be observed separately, and the position on the
scale (with their brightness, width, colour, and sharpness) of
It is more convenient to employ
the lines should be noted.
purpose the copies which are published of Bunsen
and Kirchhoff's maps, or Table 19, which was drawn up by
means of Bunsen's apparatus. For this purpose the scale of
for this
the apparatus
The
may
manner
following
positions of a few
known
or
Ka, Li
Na
a,
the instrument.
square -ruled
and in
D, F, G, H, in sunlight,
a, Sr 8, K/3) are observed on the scale of
The observed positions are laid down on
paper
as
a,
abscissae,
and
the
corresponding
50th
division;
observations.
the
scales
The curve
is
compared by a series of
more conveniently constructed,
the scale, by taking the differare
120
SPECTEUM ANALYSIS.
III.
The
lines
The Analysis.
those
stances.
In doing
to
be
First,
noted,
tliis
approximately at
but,
least,
their
brightness,
/3 and Zi a fall
very near together but while >SV ^ is hazy, Zi a is quite
Bands may be represented graphically by making
sharp.
the intensity of the light at any point the ordinate at the
point, and so draw a curve to represent the spectrum.
For
For instance, Sr
it is
best to
make
use of
The bodies
it
down
narrow
slit,
in order to
Similarly,
it
is
well to employ
which are
less
first,
a small gas-
then a
The
make
their appearance.
The bodies
and
as carbonates.
The
by ignition
The intensity of
the light is in this case momentarily restored by moistening
the bead with hydrochloric acid.
The most effectual w^ay
ment,
is
MEASUEEMENT OF WA\T:-LENGTH.
difficulty, is
moistening
121
it
by a cover
off,
by
a black
for
only leaves a passage for the light through the three tubes,
by a black paper shade hung from the telescope.
and, lastly,
The
last renders
The
use unnecessary.
illuminated than
is
more strongly
and numbers.
any
much sodium
special
to procure
it.
42.
Eay
of Light.
to the
slit,
slit,
test-Hnes)
telescope
is first
we
The
fainter images
S.-,,
X=
sin 8^
|-
sin 8^
=^
sin
8^, etc.
122
For
and
so,
when
collected
by
perpendicular
least distance
other.
is
dispersed
by the grating
into
11 2)
.are
first
is
approached.
43.
I.
The radius
With
the Spheromctcr.
surface of a lens
can,
when
is
it
e.g.
the
face
known
to
be plane (39,
7).
By
height that
all
sur-
made
the surface.
of
such a
This adjust-
ment
is
known with
The instrument
is
screw
is
123
all
is
to be determined,
and the
same time.
The positions of the middle point in the two experiments differ by a certain number of revolutions of the
screw.
The whole numbers will be reckoned by the
number of turns of the screw, or by the scale at the side,
of which each division corresponds to one turn of the screw
at the
number
of revolutions, multiplied
its head.
The
by the distance between
= this distance
= the side of the
;
equilateral triangle
if
is
6a
For
?'
sides
we have
Since further
7t^
= |-
P, the
Example.
From the position in which all four points rest on
a plane, the centre point had to be raised 6 '2 7 2 turns of the
screw in order that all four might rest on the surface of a convex
lens.
The distance between the threads of the screw = 0*5 mm.,
hence a = 3"136 mm.
The side of the equilateral triangle formed
is
^7M36 +
3-136
is
,
^- = ^^3-^^"
to
be tested by
it, is
may
124
II.
Tlie determination
spherometer
By
Reflection.
of the
The
front of
is
it
if
In order
reflecting,
arranged
is
so
that
the
at
de-
to
we may
pro-
object
measured
by the
radius of curvature
is
as
surface
to
are j^laced
be
in
is
to the line
placed a small scale divided on glass.
surface, of
scale with
If then
from
the surface
L+
The
_cj
lor a convex, or
telescope.
^
FOCAL LENGTH OF A LENS.
125
also be determined
(44).
The length A
by the
112
=^
of this image
is
j4t
formulae
jected
we
find a
upon the
+ ~
rule ~
= ^
given by
A=
(|^
is
y=
The
From
line
behind the
a,
these
two
TT
A
A+
=X
a'
A-\-r
L-21
formula for concave surfaces.
44.
The focus
-^
"^
of a lens
is
is
The two
is its
of
In concave lenses
The number
jDarallel to
The distance
of a
radii of curvature, r
,,/l
- = (/x 1) ^\r
/ ^^
When
a surface
is
+-1\
concave
or /A=
rV
its
rr'
fr + r
1.
radius of curvature
must be
taken as negative.
In
all
tlie
'
126
is
telescope
dista.nt
object.
telescope at
writing on
clearly visible.
This distance
is
(3.)
used to determine
also be
the lens
is
{e.g.
will, a certain
placed a
tlie
On
focal length.
may
one side of
light,
Taking a and h
image from the lens,
it.
111
/
(4.)
ah
a+b
screen,
considerable distance
there
a certain
/,
'
which
are
are fixed at
two positions
is
may
FOCAL LENGTH OF A LENS.
127
of parallax.
= -?, and
- +
i a
J
The elimination
/ as
a +
-.
for
from
111,1
the object be
= -.
f
ae
above.
(5.)
Wlien the
size of the
image
is
the object, both the image and the object are at a distance
is
When this is not the case, we understand by the focal length the distance of the point of convergence of rays falling parallel on the lens from the ^jrmct-
it
may
2xil
be neglected.
The principal
may be
plane
plane,
or system of lenses
may
be found as follows
it
is
On one
On
is
best of
upon
it.
taking
I,
side
placed, a little
is
a white screen
But, without
of a thick lens
L, the length of
its
image
is
lens
Then
128
we may
Conversely, also,
and measure
much
its
image,
now
For
this
lens.
by
must be so placed that the divisions on
the glass and the image of the object are clearly visible
We must then take, in the previous forthrough the lens.
mula, I for the length of the image, and L for that of the
object, and A for the distance of the latter from the lens.
purpose
means
it
is
of a lens.
It
^+=^
ting
in the
- =
Since
is
large
instead of the
first
equation
we
--
By put-
unknown
is
of the
common
focal length
/ of
111
which
focal length,
by one
F = the
F'
i.e.
F F'
ov
FF'
=
f
' ~ F-F
For
distance.
when thrown on a
screen at a given
let
lens
129
Ad
0"0094
is
When
sun.
term
may be
of light
45.
the lens
is
neglected,
on the screen
is
I.
of a lens
must be determined by
is
lens or a combination of
lens.
article.
Calling
/=
=
is
may
be taken as 25 cm.
A, we have
~r
+ 7
1^6^
LA
^==
II.
A
-7.
I'elescojw.
is
it
compared
is
130
MAGNIFYING POWER.
TELESCOPE.
The
telescope
its
length,
is
placed
before
divisions of
while the
magnifying power
tiie
actual
scale, as
distance
is
divisions,
the
is
m=
n
by
A short-sighted
spectacles.
(2.)
hofen's)
At
may
be used.
The telescope
is
method (Walten-
_a
n' A'
(3.)
card-board), or
by a transparent
scale.
Tlie
remaining lenses
MAGNIFYING POWER.
131
TELESCOPE.
The
To carry out
this
The
may
coming from
its
is
when
The
L in
-j
The
the case.
...
F be
power
is,
as is
distinctly seen,
is
A=F-\-f.
The' object
(4.)
If
are
a distant object
of the length
Therefore
if this is
well known,
is,
Telescope.
we
objective,
if
F
= -jfL = jj
-
No.
6).
.-
may
be calculated.
and distances
For example,
is
making a
little use,
(5.)
The
view
is
the angle
made by
MICROSCOPE.
MAGNIFYING POWER.
132
= 57-3.-.
a
not available, a weak lens in front of the object2, and the scale brought to the
is
may
be used as in No.
is
Microscope.
of a microscope
may be
taken
average
we may
take as 2 5 cm.
the
sees
object
the other glances at the rule and measures upon it the proIf the image
jection of the image visible in the microscope.
appear
sions, the
power
Better
still,
been rubbed
is
its
actual size
divi-
off in
is
the middle,
may
also
which has
up 25 cm. to
same eye the object under the
one
side, so
SACCHARIMETRY.
lo'd
25
cm.,
it
tlie
may
be
])vo-
employed
If a microscope be
(2.)
for
measuring small
eye-piece,
known value
becomes necessary
it
know,
to
The measurement
object.
of this ratio
is
easily
by
know
not necessary to
be
much more
latter,
once for
directly determined
all,
by employing
may
for
the
measuring
(a
scale).
it must
by any change
in the relative position of the eye-piece and objective.
The
eye-piece used for measurement must therefore always have
the same position in the tube.
46.
is
altered
DETERMINATION OF THE
SACCHARIMETRY.
EoTATiNG Power.
If the field of view of a polariscope with crossed
when
a transparent body
substance
is
said
to
have
is
right-handed
"
i.e.
light.
rotation
it
when
"
active,"
polarised
Mcol
inserted,
is
i.e.
it,
hands.
SACCHARIMETRY.
134
We
may
same way.
The angle a through which the plane of polarisation of
the light is rotated by a solution of sugar, which contains z
grms. of sugar in 1 c.c, is, in a column I mm. long (according
to
Wild)
yellow light of the sodium flame
for the
for
0-6C42
I,
whence
z=
1-5056
sodium
The instruments
for
have either
meters)
divided
I.
(1.)
The
consisted
common
circle.
rotat-
flame itself
or
cell
Then a
salt
may
containing
tube,
empty
solution
of
bichromate
or filled with
of
pure water,
instrument,
potash.
is
placed
and the
index turned over the circle nearest the eye until the middle
135
SACCHARIMETEY,
The number
must be turned to the
bright.
of degrees through
we
may
be dark again,
a.
is
dark.
is
to
This
"
from blue to
rotation
is
Mean
Eotation.
By
this
Eed.
Yellow.
1
Green.
-<
Blue.
Violet.
|-
one can, with the aid of the numbers given in the pre-
136
SACCHARIMETKY.
appearances of the
tlie
is
attained
by the
DouUe Quartz
Plate.
Two
most suitably
3" 7 5
mm.
The
plates
When
the
When
tint.
In
Wild's Polaristrohomcter.
(3.)
(due to a
Savart's
plate)
are
In
this
instrument bands
but coloured
is first
when white
light is used.
The eye-piece
possible.
The adjustment
darkening of the
for saccharimetry
field,
is,
field
of view.
which
is
Since
it is
the
by the
as seen
to that of the
other.
ing in
The measurement
all
is made more accurate by observthe four quadrants, both with and without the
sugar solution.
SACCHAKIMETEY.
As
to
how
137
is
90,
may
be
which,
sugar contained in 1
litre of
Laurent's Apparatus.
brightness
may
again be produced.
Jellet's
field
of view,
II.
The
(Soleil).
by a
solution of
may
any
light, since
is
Wedge-shaped quartz
plates, of
Soleil's
is
used, placed in
and observed through a teleAn ordinary broad flame is used and the eye-piece is
scope.
first so far drawn out that the quartz plate appears sharply
defined.
The adjustment is made to the same colours in
the two semicircles, and usually the " sensitive " transition
front of the polarising Nicol
SACCHAEIMETEY.
138
tint
sugar
is
coloured
the violet.
it is
clioseu.
In order to obtain
by
is
better to use
be, using
in 1
c.c.
a tube
divisions
Soleil
Soleil
Duboscq
Ventzke
s:
= 0-1635
|?,
- 0-2605
ja
For specimens of sugar, therefore, in which the percentage of pure sugar is to be determined, the rule is dissolve
16"35 (or 26-05) grms. of the sugar to 100 c.c. of the solution; the displacement then gives the percentage of pure
:
sugar.
" normal solu16-35
(or
grms. in
26-05)
of pure sugar containing
must
amount
to 100
The
displacement
100 c.c. is used.
by
are
determined
value
unknown
Divisions of
divisions.
To
divisions, a
tion "
experiments on solutions of
known
strength.
same
colour.
139
SACCHARIMETEY.
The
{e.g.
inverted
is,
by warm-
temperature.
An
tains in 1
z grms. of
c.c.
plane of polarisation of
ture
t',
inverted solution
Hence the
= (0-2933-0-00336/')5;.
practical rule
of the quartz
{i.e.
the
c.c.
of the solution
the fluid has cooled, a tube one-tenth longer than the former
is taken (or if the same tube be used, the angle obtained
must be multiplied by I'l), and the rotation to the left,
Let the
a (or p'), which now is produced, is observed.
one
The angle
is
t'.
then calculated
a
a'
(or
2')
+ p)
1-442 _ 0-00506^^"
For
if
wish to eliminate
a'
0-66420^ ^-/3
Consequently
a
But
a'
= (0-9575 - 0-00336/')
= (1-442 -0-00506/')
due
zl
.
0-6642e^.
we
l-iO
46a.
Investigation
of
Doubly
Eegognition of
the
Eefeacting
Optical
Bodies.
Chaeacters of
Uniaxial Crystals.
body
former
when
refracts
it is
light
singly
either
amorphous or
or
when it belongs
when it has
the
doubly;
in different directions
received different
by other
causes, such as
the
polarisation
apparatus,
i.e.
coml^ination
of
two
sets of glass
plates laid
over one another, through which the light passes at the same
angle of incidence.
For many purposes a pencil of light
crystal
and the
field) is required.
convex lenses
For
observations on small bodies in polarised light with the
ordinary microscope, a Nicol's prism is introduced between
the mirror and the body, and another is placed over the
are inserted
polariser
(ISTorremberg's polarisation
microscope).
polarising
apparatus
is
mostly
when
used
is
termed
with
the
appears dark.
The two planes of polarisation of the
arrangements, in this case at right angles to each other, are
called the " principal planes " of the apparatus.
refracting is deter-
A singly refracting
refraction,
xi
doubly refracting
141
Only in
of view bright or coloured.
and then only with a smaU field of view,
field
Let
now
This
given.
of
remains dark.
it,
In these
is
when
the
The darkness
monochromatic
Only
show
when
The more
field.
i.e.
quartz) do not
is
extraordinary rays.
fUm
is
used, that
is,
a plate of such a
is
placed anywhere
is
inclined at an
The
142
bright, are
two dark
spots.
extraordinary ray
is
less
Mica can be
is
known
axes
is
of the axes
in a
calcspar, negative
may
(the
plane
positive.
to
{e.g.
negative
is
crystal
easily split to
is
It
optic
on a known
it
quartz, positive).
also be determined
its
The plane
The phenomena
crystal
Assume
that the
i.e. the
ray vibrating radially in the apparatus, has a greater velocity
than the ordinary ray, Avith its vibrations tangential.
At a
certain inclination to the axis {i.e. in the figure, at a certain distance from the centre which must lie inside the first dark ring),
the ray with radial vibrations will have gained on the other by
one-fourth of a wave-length.
Now in a plate of mica a ray with vibrations parallel to the
plane of the axes is propagated more slowly than in other
is
directions
If
now
compared
Avith
of the above-
is accelerated a
quarter wave-length in the crystal, those are received into the
eye which lie in the plane of the axes of the mica, it is seen
that the diff"erence of phase is increased by the mica.
The two
dark sj^ots therefore appear near the centre of the field in the
plane of the axes of the mica.
It follows of course that a positive crystal must behave in an
exactly opposite manner.
Similarly it is easily seen that the
diameter of the rings is increased by one-fourth of the distance
On
in the
compare 40.
of
crystals
axgle of optic axes of a ceystal.
143
47.
to
tlie
of
bisectrix
the
When
axes.
the
view
(or
sufficiently large, a
is
system of
lemniscates traversed by a
coloured)
(see
The two
which the lemni-
figure).
centres round
scates
When
images of
joining the
line
the
the
the
crystal
plate
is
''
rotated
mark
is
hyperbola)
field of
taken.
is
and one
marked
direction
the apparatus.
may
must be
on the cross-
plate
fall
i.e.
the angle
its
optic axes.
which
144
mean index
of refraction
SCALE.
of the crystal
is
known
1.
=~1-1
sin ia.
1
sm ^a
"
line of vision.
sin
^a
= N sin
Ja'.
is different
ment
of an axis
when observed
tlie fluid,
48.
from
1 to 5
same
scale at the
image
level as
is
the mirror;
At a
distance of
fixed a horizontal
and
its
reflected
is
The
wires.
latter.
scale
must be
so placed that
145
SCALE.
when
cross-
the magnet
in
its
position of equilibrium, to
We
magnet
its "
mean
Arrangement of
is first
the
position."
Telescope
and
Scale.
The
telescope
and
an
is
The image
of the
by
movement of the latter.
Lastly, the fine adjustments must be made the cross-wires mtist be clearly focussed,
and the telescope then drawn out till the scale and cross
show no parallax; that is, till their relative position is
unaltered by moving the eye before the eye-piece.
a slight
must be obtained
in each case
by moving only
time.]
146
Argentic nitrate
ammonia added
down is almost
and
till
the precipitate
The
entirely redissolved.
100
diluted, so that
c.c.
contain
first
solution
is
filtered
(2.)
and
thrown
is
to the solution
little
water,
The
In an
millimetres deep with equal volumes of the two solutions.
hour the reduction will be complete ; the plates are Avashed and
the operation repeated until a sufficient coating of silver is obtained.
49.
We
position" (see
p.
deflection through
this position.
As
we
(p
etc., is
the angle of
turned from
the scale-reading
reflecting surface
(millimetres, if
it
in degrees of arc
and, indeed,
if
is
proportional to
28-648
1718'-9
103132"
tlie
may always
The
error
may amount
at
be assumed.
most
2
0-0016
0-003G
0-0064
0-010
in deflections of
147
1718'. 9
/.
71
n\
{^-4}
is
i -^^
required instead
n
tan (p--r
^
2r
sill
sm =
Hence we reduce a
-|,
or
^^
(3.)
-^
scale-reading
and sine
to the corresponding
of half-angle,
by subtracting
^,
respectively from n,
The
b-Km
~
ir
last
formula
|-
tan
given by simple geometrical conby taking the first two terms only of
is
<p,
tan
p, etc.
^ of
their thickness
must be reckoned
in the distance.
Paper
millimetres
scales
;
is
are
/;'
148
50.
manner
If the oscillations
Observation of Turning- Point.
are rapid or large, a number of successive turning-points of
the cross-wires (i.e. points at which the direction of motion
(1.)
is
the arithmetical
may
From any
three of
be found by taking
the article (7) on the determination of the position of equilibrium of a balance, which is completely applicable to the
present case.
position of equilibrium.
As an example we may
by Gauss.
time of oscillation
Time.
irs.
is
Po
Mean
oi p^.
mins. sees.
59
30
40
50
10
10
20
30
475-0
474-8
476-0
477-1
476-8
476-1
477-1
475-50
5-95
6-40
6-60
6-95
476-28
149
(3.)
only applicable
slowly.
If, however, the magnet be damped and rapidly
brought to rest (by the employment of a copper frame), the
position of eqviilibrium ^^
is
by the time
of
one
oscillation,
by
Here k
is
angular measure
is
as the needle.
is
The reduction
of scale-readings to
rarely necessary.
is,
to rest, a
magnet
is
frequently em-
at the right
for the
51.
needle which
rounding
coils
of
a multiplier,
is
of
great importance in
galvanic
150
which,
if
the oscillations
If , be the
angular measure (article 49), gives the arc.
amplitude of the with, and a^^ that of the n\h oscillation, the
damping
ratio of
^_ lo(j.a,n-lorf.an,
n
result
when
is
aba'ut
Uiri
(article
of the
to
49),
numbers proportional
reduce
mirror
r= 2 6
is
the
Iti
arcs,
etc.,
/;=
1*151,
is
scale-divisions.
of
(50, 3)
to
The distance
combinations of the
is
damping,
scale-readings
when
the ratio of
known.
Exam.pl 3
Observed
turniDg-
v?
points.
285-0
710-0
341-2
662-5
383-9
625-7
415-6
215
210
159
162
116
126
84
3 X 2600-''
0-5
0-5
0-2
0-2
01
0-1
0-0
Corrected
turniugpoints.
285-5
709-5
341-4
662-3
384-0
625-6
415-6
Arcs
2-151
Position of
Equilibrium.
424-0
368-1
320-9
278-3
241-6
210-0
197-1
171-1
149-2
129-4
112-3
97-6
512-4
512-5
513-1
513-4
513-3
513-2
Mean -513-09
151
TIME OF OSCILLATION.
We
obtain therefore
A=i
and
4,
5,
6,
from
424-0-%.
{log.
368-1
320-9
0-0610
0-0609
0-0614
Mean A = 0-0611
278-3)
241-6
210-0
^=1-151
the
If the
air.
the former subtracted from that of the latter gives the required
decrement due to the multiplier alone. (71, III.)
By employing natural logarithms or multiplying the value of
X as found above by 2-3026, we obtain the "natural logarithmic
decrement."
52.
The time
of oscillation of a
position of equilibrium
is
body
The
however,
is
moment
the
hand
other
unsuitable
it
for
dn-ect
instant of turning,
observation, as at
is
its
insensible.
On
that
the
position of equilibrium
may
From
be exactly observed.
intermediate turning-point
is
directions, that
arithmetical mean.
it
is
marked on
at
which
it
is
seconds clock.
from a consecutive
mean be
again taken,
it
series of
152
TIME OF OSCILLATION
and
tlie first
last observation
Time
Time
of crossing
(observed).
of turning
m.
10
sec.
m.
sec.
10
9-90
23-20
3.3
16-5
29-9
43-0
56-6
11
11
Time
of oscillation.
(calculated).
9-9
39-90
from Nos.
and
= 13-30
4,
36-45
49-80
5,
3-25
16-60
6,
= 13-35
3
40-15
13-38
Mean
13-34
23-3
We
mean
of the whole.
Example
First Set,
No.
29-0
45-6
6.
m.
sec.
4 10-6
2.
5.
passing.
sec.
3.
4.
Times of
Means.
passing.
m.
1.
Second
Times of
4-0
20-7
38-9
Mean
m.
9
3
2
4
5
of whole
4 54-80
54-85
54-75
4 54-80
10
sec.
Set,
Means.
m.
sec.
25-5
43-9
0-6
18-9
35-6
53-9
10 9-75
9-75
9-70
10 9-73
OF A MAGNETIC NEEDLE.
153
number
lation
with
the
greatest
accuracy.
It
not necessary
is
number may be
An
approximafrom either
series.
Taking, for example, the first from the first and
last pairs of observations are obtained the times of two
19*8 sec. and 5 m. 29*8 sec,
elongations
viz. 4 m.
between which four oscillations have occurred.
Hence the
tion to the time of oscillation
easily obtained
is
time of oscillation
is
r =17"5
If this
sec.
number and
the
number
of oscillations sought.
314*93
sec.
j-^ = 17*496.
respectively
is
the
Were 17
or
would be obtained
number
of
of oscillations in
oscillation
is
therefore
as the period,
and neither of
the
mean
squares
may
This
by equal
be employed
intervals, the
method
exactly as in page 1
of least
5.
oscillations
for
more rapid
by
and
oscillations,
of) passings,
forming the
154
increase
ally
tlie
The
possibility
The time
of oscillation of a "
logarithmic decrement
as
\/7r2+ (2-306X)-^ to
It
is
of
(51)
is
damped
"
to that without
damping
tt.
scale, or
with
an
is
of seconds between
telescope.
53.
As we
tude.
time approaches
when
we
155
must apply a
which are
Taking
t
= the
= the
64
is
4/
To
may
This correction
its
is
applicable to a
pendulum moved by
which draws
it
towards
The method
position of equilibrium
its
is
pro-
angle of displacement.
its
and
scale
300
50 to
small that the first term
We may therefore
2?
= the
= the
distance
of
also expressed
in
divisions of scale
^"'^
The value of a
may
256?'
be taken as the
mean
observed oscillations.
above formula)
and last
tion a,
we
call
and
the
mean
of the
their difference d,
/
ft
first
or
1
d'
2^ is
-.
24 a
oscilla-
MOMENT OF
156
INERTIA.
for reduction of
time of oscillation
is
+ i
^
- +
sin
4
64
sin
is
all
is
scale observations
may
article 49.
54.
is
the
sum
or
must of
course be expressed by some units of length and mass.
This is most briefly expressed by writing after the number
for the moment of inertia g. cm.- or mg. mm,- (see Appendix
integral of those of all the individual points.
It
10).
required
moment
of inertia.
K=m.
12
edges.
The moment
of inertia
Biglit-anglecl jjarallclopipedon.
MOMENT OF
157
INERTIA.
perpendicular to a and
is,
I), is
a"
Tjr
If
12
Cylinder of radius r referred to the axis of the cylinder
K-=m
-.
2
(/
tlie
A=m
4-
\12
Hollow cylinder
of r^ inner,
and
Moment
r^ outer radius.
K7^ = m
r: + r^
2
J2
Sphere of radius
r,
r" +
^
+
r;
referred to a diameter
K = m -2
f.
Example.
6
is
mm.
The moment
radius,
88030
of inertia of a
long,
(-- +
7")
= 74150000
g.
cm.'
given, the
moment
parallel to the
first,
may be
other axis
the pro-
duct of the mass of the body m and the square of the distance a
between the new axis and the centre of gravity ; that is
K.
= K + am.
158
MOMENT OF
INERTIA.
The moment
If
alone
^'
r:f=(K + Jc):K
and therefore the required moment
of inertia of the
body
alone
inertia of the
159
COEFFICIENT OF TORSION,
Example.
The two cylindrical weights are each 10 mm. in
diameter
r=5 or 0"5 cm.
50000 or 50 g.
they weigh together 50 grm.
m=
The
hung=
^-
^=9-754
(1
1262-8
mean
g.
cm.
arc of
-0-00170) = 9-737.
2d, Of the magnet loaded with the above weights, 14-311 sec.
in an arc of 25-5 ; therefore
^'
14-311
(1
-0.00310)=
"
= 110110000
In order
to
14-267' -9-737-
mgr. mm.-, or
llOM
cm.'
g.
Coefficient of Torsion.
55.
to
magnet
of inertia of the
ir=;t-r^= 126280000
"
t"-t-
14-267.
make
absolute measurements,
it is
necessary
suspending
magnetism.
fibre
magnetism
is
On
this
itself,
supposition, therefore,
so long as
for
it is very-
MAGNETIC INCLINATION.
160
twisted,
observed
is first
communicated
to
it,
is
is
again
observed.
If
a
<p
= the
= the
is
In instruments for
fibre is attached, either
be measured
magnet must
in
degrees,
it.
of
course
is
unit.
Magnetic Inclination.
56.
Inclination
same
with
its
geometrical axis.
satisfying these
two
conditions
necessitates
the
mode
of
divided
circle
in
the
magnetic
MAGNETIC INCLINATION.
meridian
is
pass-needle,
161
which
an
accuracy within
or
is
sufficient.
It is
we
that this
An
vertical
the
is
the case.
is first
placed
division of
of rotation
level,
when
the axis
approximately adjusted,
is
is
arranged
if
If now,
correction of this).
its first position,
there
is
still
when
is
a deviation,
it
is
returned to
must again be
points
observed angle."
On
movable
circle,
the
circle
we
with movable
the
instrument).
Any
longitudinal
displacement of the
162
MAGNETIC INCLINATION.
We
(1.)
-vj/j
(2.)
the
when
first
the needle
axis,
(3.)
<Pi
-v^j
(4.)
I.
turned 180.
the magnetism of the needle is reversed by
stroking with a bar magnet in position 1.
when the remagnetised needle is placed in position 2,
or the circle turned 180.
when
If these angles
the arithmetical
II.
In any case
it
may
managed by grinding
easily be
and
also ^,
and
tani = l (tan
III.
we must
is
mean
^' "^
Should, however,
^^
ahke
'
and
tan
-^^
(p^
and
-^
and then
'^'^^^
write
and calculate
cot !
=I
{cot
cot a^
=l
{cot
+ cot
f^ + cot
(p^
-v^j),
-^^
lastly
tan
It is obvious that
=I
{tan a^
+ tan
a^.
be eliminated.
II.
and
III. are
Formula
I.
also needs
no remark.
Formulae
unknown
dis-
placement of the centre of gravity resolved into its components, parallel and perpendicular to the magnetic axis of
the needle, and considering the conditions of equilibrium
between magnetic force and that of gravitation.
163
MAGNETIC INCLINATION.
Were
ment
<p^
the observed
mag-
its
of
<f>^
now
If
'
'
we have
MT sin (i f^
is
By
cross
cos
p^).
multiplication of these
i cos
<p
cos
<p^,
we
obtain
tan
tan f^
or (II.) tan
It
is
is
=|
= tan
(tan
<p^
(p^
- tan
tan
i ;
p^)-
if it
is
and
very
after remagnetisation.
It is
well,
to
begin with, to
observations f^
and
<p^,
the
needle
is
The stroking
.
itself is
Holding
the needle
by one
half,
is
drawn
as in the
figure.
Fie.
^ 12.
On
again.
it is
(7).
MAGNETIC DECLINATION.
164
57.
By
is
from the
latter
declination
"
is
to
the
magnetic
of a
.axis
and, to indiis
counted
us, therefore,
As we cannot he
west."
position of the
With
former.
angle
the
certain of the
needle,
we must,
for
For the measurement (after Gauss) we require a theowith a horizontal circle, a distant mark (or if near, in
the focus of a lens placed before it), of which the astronomical azimuth (that is, the horizontal angle which a straight
line, drawn through it from the theodolite, forms with the
astronomical meridian) is known (see 88); and lastly, a
magnetometer of which the needle can be turned upside
down.
The theodolite is placed nearly in the
same magnetic meridian as the suspending thread
of the needle, and its telescope at the same
dolite
focal length as
other end
cross
is
threads,
through the
mark
or
lens,
At
the
divided glass),
which, seen
The
theodolite
is
num-
way
from
The
Fig. 13.
is,
left to right).
observations,'
strument
is
made
are as follows
vertical
by the
(p.
161),
MAGNETIC DECLINATION.
(1.)
The
telescope
is
now = a.
If
165
circle
be
be the
must be turned
to the division
magnet,
The
let
may
the
mark on
the
a^.
side
is
slightly.
Now
when
To determine
the suspending thread has no torsion.
and eliminate the latter, we must measure the angle to which
For this
the thread has been twisted in the observation.
purpose the magnet must be taken from its stirruj), an unmagnetised bar of equal weight substituted for it and the
turning of the stirrup by this change measured on a divided
Should this angle of rotation = f in
circle laid underneath.
the same direction as the sun's daily course, the declination
;
will be
d
= d' +
0(p
The smallest
is
its
position of equilibrium
moments
it.
MEASUKEMENT OF HOKIZONTAL INTENSITY.
166
58.
Table 23 contains the angles of deviation of the magfrom the astronomic meridian, for the (geographical)
The declination so
latitudes and longitudes of mid-Europe.
netic
1.
obtained will rarely differ from the actual more than
This possibility of determining an astronomical direction
The influence of
slightly shaking the
friction
It is obvious
59.
The
field, is
it
exerts
the
first
intensity
moment
may
of the earth's
of
inertia of the
the
swinging magnet,
magnet be known.
The
if
the
M
ratio
-fp
moment
is
of
found by
by bringing the
first
to a
it.
From
167
HORIZONTAL INTENSITY.
these two
M may be
numbers
determined.
After Gauss
all
I,
Determinatioii of
MT.
then,
= the
K= the
moment
= the
magnet (54)
of inertia of the
MT
M.T= f
-^^
(1
+ 0)
MT
we
A.
In the suspension of small bars cocoon silk is always
employed on account of its small torsion either in single
Such a bundle may
fibres or in bundles of several threads.
be produced by fixing two glass rods on the edge of the
will call
its
The
as to
fixed to the
single cocoon
fibre
magnet and
will
sustain
Bars exceeding
about 1 5 grm. without danger of breaking.
1 pound in weight must be hung by wires (of brass or
steel).
In
this
torsion
of
the wire
is
168
HORIZONTAL INTENSITY.
magnet a
it
Determination of ^
II.
By
we have
from two pairs of
equal distances on a magnet needle which can oscillate in
a horizontal plane, and each time observing the angle through
which the needle is deflected, we obtain the ratio of the
magnetic moment
to the horizontal force of the earth's
magnetism according to the following rules.
(For the effect
ofjhe suspending thread, see pp. 159 and 165.)
called the magnetic
moment M,
to act
First Arrangement
c is
S
The
position
NS represents
line
which the
The
deflecting
i.e.
the
magnet
centre
The bar
westward.
at both ends.
that
its
he, a'c
= b'c.
The
deflecting bar
opposite pole
is
HOKIZONTAL INTENSITY.
169
supposed in the foregoing that the circle of the comdivided in one direction from 0 to 360, the most
It is
pass
is
convenient arrangement.
two
are
zeros,
sides, instead of
a', h',
and
wiU thus be
If we take
(each
f
<p'
r
r
it
they
case,
numbered
is
the positions
sometimes the
as is
If,
to both
we
is
must,
done
for
h.
cib,
r*
tan
~T^^
The number thus
<p
- r'*
tan
<f)'
r - r"
obtained,
which we denote by B,
3TT=A
by
M
-m=B, and
if
we
divide
observed,
first
subtraction, the
r tan
<p
If at a second distance
we have
plying the
- r'^
similarly tan
(p'
-^
;^(
the deflection
+ 2)-
By
f'
be
multi-
unknown
tan p'
{f - r").
horizontal intensity.
170
Second Aerangeivient
3f
may also be
in the
"77
,,
,
The
deflecting
further, taking
<p
31
The method
following aims:
r^
tan
- r'^
<p
of observation
By
tan
<p'
both ends of the needle, and taking the mean, the influence
circle of the
make
The length
Simplification
The
of
a'h'.
deflection at
than 6
the compass-
repeatedly used.
is
necessary for
HORIZONTAL INTENSITY.
l7l
tion
to
may
make
be simplified.
It
is
all,
From
r'^
/
If,
tan
tan
distance
of the bar,
'
<(>
we have simply
M_
or, similarly,
- r^ tan p
- r'^ tan
a'
<p
EUan ^
anted).
If the deflection be
mirror and scale (48), instead of with a compass, the procedure is the same as above described (except the reading
becomes
r'-
In accurate determinations
magnetism
that the
<p'
(1+^)
r"-
of the
it
bar
must
when
also be considered
is
moment
value of
fraction.
1000.
The
If
originally found
must be diminished by i
this
HOEIZONTAL INTENSITY.
172
The observations
made
course, be
oscillation
of
in the
same
might exercise a
the
place.
the earth
or
the
of
Variations of magnetism
53).
The
terrestrial
On
moment
must be made soon
the magnetic
observations
two places
is
of
after
if
Measurement
of
Magnetometer.
I.
Moment of
Determination of MT.
Inertia.
The
magnetic
parallelepiped,
=
156) its moment
breadth
p.
&
K= 19860
bar
a
a right-angled
is
m= 119860
mgr.
By
the
(54,
of inertia
^QQ +^^'^
12
By
This
Time of Oscillation.
where the mean arc of
was found
to
= 7-414 -
time of oscillation
7-4-14 X 0-0043
= 7*382
sec.
l73
HOEIZONTAL INTENSITY.
Calculation of BIT.
-^_
3-1416^ X 101440000
or7^
^^^
faT)
Determination of
is
loom
nnn
''''''''
7-382- X 1-0039
II.
"^-' S-
-^^^-
into millimetres,
magnet
as
made
When
2d end.
1st end.
i\^
99-4
79-9
Half difference
9-75
Mean
279-8
260-6
9-60
9-67
200 mm.
800
900
22-67
9-87
deflection,
the
<p
i-
= 9-77 = 9
22-41
<p
and
46'
(p
22-54
distances r
From
M=
1
^
these
we now
= 22
32'.
obtain
(p.
mm.
169)
400^-300'
The required
obtained by taking
and / are
The two
h (900
p',
^^.-onr^ mm.
=5387800
therefore
'=
/ 18301 000
5387^
5387800
= 1-843
mo'^
"
sec.
mm.i
is
174
HOKIZONTAL INTENSITY.
In the cm.
g.
T= 0-1843 -^
cm.*
The
sec.
00 times smaller.
(See also
\
Thus we
Appendix
and Table
1
magnet from
1000 times
shall
have
28.)/
this investiga-
tion will be
PC
^=
T
^
3627
= 5387800,
175
by that
Trans.
60,
Compensated Magnetometer,
is principally intended
comparison of horizontal intensity at different places,
absolute determination.
for
It consists
placed with
its
threefold.
When
the frame
compass, the smaller bars are east and west of the needle
(p,
The
direction,
must
(p.
170),
same
magnets
act in the
of the smaller
Ohservation
that
when
magnets
larger
is
in
is
noted,
turned 180 in
both
The half
ends
difference
of
The frame
frame
result.
plane, and
its
the
needle
of these
is
observed, the
being read
two positions
is
each time.
the angle of
deflection.
mirror
may
176
To
scale.
the
determine
I.
Places.
magnetism of the deflecting bars may be conunchanged between two observations (that is, when
there is only a short time between them and the temperatures of the two places are nearly equal), it is only
necessary to observe the angles of deflection, <p^ and <p^.
The horizontal intensities of the places are inversely proIf the
sidered
_ tan
Differences of temperature
may
" of
the magnets
known.
II.
same
when all
Then
we
If
is
If,
must
t^
direction.
t^
T,
t^
tan
tan
<p^
9,
we
call
2r the distance
of.
r\/]tan
'
f V
r'
21^
l77
BIFILAR MAGNETOMETER.
The centre
pin on which
of a
it is
magnet
is
movable.
of
symmetry
may
the second
their
pivots
mean
the
magnet about
all
the
of
of the
be twice observed
as
(p.
(p.
With
a deflecting
magnet
ished distance more rapidly than tlie inverse cube of the latter
with one acting from the north or south (p. 170) more slowly;
that is, the quantity denoted by x in the note (p. 169) is in
the former case positive, and in the latter negative.
These corrections compensate each other with similarly-formed magnets,
when
3,
If,
moments
M the
and
of the magnetic
magnets respectively, in
smaller
cos (p=
sum
T sin
magnets,
The time
(p.
yields
Hence follows
the
therefore,
our
of oscillation
result
(p.
167)
1*204
of the larger
instrument
/,
as 1
we denote by
and
(-^+03)
{M+m) T=^^
under
7T.
31
be considered constant, and the ratio of torsion is small.
The time of oscillation, Avith oppositely directed magnets,
at once the formula
I.,
the ratio 7n
if
tt'K
yields
M + 'm\}
{M - m) T = ^(
M-my
two equations the formula under
and
and
lastly,
61.
In order
to
by writing
II.
by elimination of
follows
for
BiFiLAR Magnetometer.
The
its centre,
so that
it lies
horizontally.
BIFILAE MAGNETOMETER,
178
The
by mirror and
scale)
which
is
terrestrial
variation.
of the scale.
In order
to
moment
(following article)
is
known magnetic
meter, at the same height as the needle, and at a considerable measured distance, r millimetres, to the north or south.
The reading
magnetometer will
divisions
on
it.
Then one
of the
differ
A=
When,
4if.
is
to be
by
7'
(Table 22).
T
The
bifilar
=T
[l+|(i^'-l')].
magnetometer
in this simple
form
is
only adapted
between the
Taking
as the magnetic
moment
of the
MAGNETISM OF A BAR.
179
moment
M
i- (comr
pare Appendix).
duced,
we have A
If a deflection of
:
= -^
n.
62.
I.
p.
1,
the scale-divisions
Gauss, Eestdt. d.
of
cf.
or Appendix, vol.
v.
p.
404.
It
is
MT=A
and
M
= ^ by multiplication,
moment
of the bar
magnetic moment
^^= V18301000
or v/l8301 X 5387-8
II.
As
= 992-98
cm.^
q}
sec.-
sec.
"^
demanded, and
approximately
known
error),
22
is
beino-
the observations of
MAGNETISM OF A BAR.
180
In most cases
it is
If
at one distance.
we
deflection
call
the magnetic
moment
M of
the magnet
is
given by the
for-
mula
M = lf
if
tan
<p,
the figure on p.
168;
or
M=
if it
be north or south
rigorously exact
when
r^
(p.
tan
l70).
f,
This
formula
is
only
the needle
is at least
3, 4, 5, 6, or 7
by (1+0)
(article 55).
Instead of this
we may determine
181
MAGNETISM OF A BAR.
the components of the magnetic
moment
in three positions
cube
is
cube
The distance r
exactly as above.
we have
M=
may
M^, M^,
Jig,
to
is
be reckoned from
If
which
it
~,
-^, and
Determination hy Oscillation.
III.
In a bar
moment
of regular
of inertia
of oscillation
t,
form we
may
thread (55)
The
torsion
may be
eliminated
by employment
of a
moment
ohm's laws.
182
63.
I.
Ohm's Laws.
In simple undivided
The
(1.)
is
electrical resistance
Circuits.
of a cylindrical conductor
sectional area a;
oi
w=^s
As we
the body.
we may
call
k=
sq.
is
ordinarily take
- the
mm.
column
section)
at 0 C.
cylindrical
and inversely
as
the conductivity
of resistance (resistance
of
must be taken
body of length
as unity.
The
resistance of a
so
of a conductor.
specific conductivity
we
to its
If the
at 0 C. of a
mercury
The
~.
q
/,
s ~, s
being
Conversely,
column
is
if
of fluid
material
= %u~, and
its
specific conductivitv
"
k = - =
s
q.
referred to quicksilver.
The
stances
specific
is
The
(2.)
sum
of the
braical
(4.)
The
sum
alge-
The current-strength or
intensity
the resistance
iv,
or
i
=C -
e,
i is
directly pro-
and inversely
so to
183
ohm's laws.
when
of the factor
C=
1.
depends on the
most simple
For example, we have
are measured.
It is
resistance in
units,
and
We
Danieirs= 11-7.
=--
-.
For ex-
produces in a closed
^ p
p 8 X 20
circuit of 100 Siems. resistance a current oi ^^[7)7^ = 1""
ample, a battery of 8 Grove's
(Compare
magnetic units.
cells
also
Galvanic Measure.)
Derived Currents in divided Circuits.
If a current i between two points of the undivided conductor branches into several paths of the resistances %v^,
w^
and in which correspondingly we have the currents
.
(5.)
The sum
divided current, or
^^
is
= i.
Z2
,...,..
sum
J.
of
The
.=
11^:
aU the
-=
l^
Ohm's
Law
according
to
Kirchhoff.
to
directly
7, are
combined in
A. At any point of division, the sum of the currentstrengths in all the branches = 0, taking the currents toivards
the juncture as of opposite sign to those
fro7P,
it.
184
GALVANIC BATTERIES.
B. If
we
a closed circuit in
and reckon in
itself,
it
all
sum
individual
resistances
into
strengths
equal to the
sum
is
the
current-
of the electro
Fig. 14.
motive forces.
For example, in Wlieatstone's bridge we obtain six
equations by taking the divided currents and their corre-
sponding resistances
/-
i^
^3
I-i^-%=0
i
i^iv^
i^w^
iw
iw
- =
+'14
i,
+ i,w, = E
+ i^w^ =
-iw
+ i/w. =
2
IW-\-
i.
(as i
-\-
'i'2~
S^ 0)
^.re
contained in
the above.
Galvanic Batteries.
II.
As
immersed dilute
seldom use it
stronger than of a sp. gr. 1"06, i.e. about 1 volume of the
strong acid to 2
volumes of water.
For feeble currents a
much weaker acid is mostly sufficient.
The mixture of
the
is
in
fluid
sulphuric acid
is
We
is
The
should be saturated.
setting up.
The
nitric acid
"concentrated"
where constancy
(sp.
in
gr.
is
of current is desired.
may
used
little as possible.
first
fluid
185
GALVANIC CONNECTIONS.
the
cell.
the
foil is
of chloride of platinum, to
with
is
foil
with platinum
which a
little
hydrochloric acid
is
zinc.
III.
Galvanic Connections.
give a
satisfactory
connection cannot be
made
connection.
Where
not
a firm
platinum.
surfaces
must be
The plugs
clean cloth or
a slight
finest
emery-paper.
186
GALVANIC RESISTANCES.
safe junction
or coj^per)
is
The contact
The disturbing
influence
needles of a galvanometer
on the
of conducting wires
may mostly
be avoided by placing
needles,
avoided.
4 mercury cups
a,
of
and 3 with 4, or 1
and 2 with 4. The wires from the battery are connected with 1 and 4 and the ends of the circuit with 2 and 3.
pair of metal bridges either 1 with 2,
with
3,
sets,
German
silver wires
are
resistance,
temperature.
to
for all
specimens of wire.
marked change
is
New
also influenced
wires experience at
The amount
of resistance.
" bifilar."
by the winding.
wound
first
of the resistance
The wire
is
are suitably
wound
The
together.
coils
when
This
currents
187
may
On
is
obvious that
of
the
copper solution or
weaker currents in
conductors
of
the
acid.
For
resistance
these
nitric
high
in single
when
series,
ti^
may
cells have,
be as nearly
when connected
maximum
The
the efficiency of the separate cells does not vary with the
strength of the current.
rents are strong
resistance
is
we
In
reality,
however,
or
Daniell's.
When
a voltameter
is
188
TANGENT-GALVANOMETEK.
64.
Galvanometer.
For many purposes relative measurement, or determination of the ratio of current-strengths, only
will therefore consider this case
is sufficient.
We
first.
or tangent-galvanometer, consists
The tangent-compass,
its
the mag-
coils in
(intensities,
quantities of electricity in
unit
of
time) are
= tan
ip
tan
<p'.
(Proof in 67.)
of deflection should
most
advantageous
(see
p.
9).
It
is
45
necessary,
employ
that
with
is,
manner a
If,
for instance,
we
obtain in this
and of
189
TANGENT-GALVANOMETER.
.
.X
of No. 1
to
make
method
1.- T 1
.1
by
must be multiplied
^
1
"^
tliem
^fW4
,
to^i
U-2
-pn^o-^
66 "0
0-253
= ttwk =
2'30
The
2,
number and
dimensions of the
Commutator.
n
iin
0-llU,
coils is
The
given in (67,
tangent-compass
p.
is
193).
usually adjusted
in
case
is
if
the
mean
of the deflection to
p.
In the value
it
unnecessary to
Law
of Proportionality of Tangents.
In order that the proportionality of tangents to currentstrengths may be accurate within 1 per cent for all angles,
Deviation
from
the
diameter ot the
coils.
must not
A short
at
most amount
to ^-^ the
TANGENT-GALVANOMETER.
190
but about
coils,
of 1
An
it.
error
may
of
-|-
the
168).
p.
Shunts on Galvanometers.
galvanometer
poses
to
is
too sensitive,
remedy
it,
any other
If the tangent or
it
is
possible for
many
pur-
for
com-
Measurements with
different
shunts
are
comparable
is
known
of the current
Shunts of
for the
latter is
..J
W + ll/
-^, -g^g-,
main
circuit.
191
SINE-GALVANOMETEK.
Sine-Galvanometer or Sine-Compass.
65.
consists of a multiplier
The multiplier
itself
is
circle.
with the
needle
(compass-angle)
as
before
or,
in other
its circle.
The strength
of the current
is
<p
viz.
the angle
In the measurement
angles must be employed
angles also
must be
= sin
i'
large.
by which
multiplication
sin f '.
of feeble
may
easily be determined,
For
this
purpose the
S%7h
Then n = ~
noted.
Ct
?,
by which
all
measurements with
sin a^
same value
as those
with
1.
We may thus
The advantage
sines
is
same measure.
of the sine-compass
independent of the
size
ELECTKO-DYNAMOMETER.
192
66.
MiKROE Galvanometers.
which
of the currents
compared
is
the greater.
At
If,
least for
empirical
known
currents,
easily graphically)
for the
only are observed with the mirror and scale (48, 49), the
currents are proportional to the tangents of the angles of
deflection
or, if
The
limit within
which
this
is
allowable
is
scale.
naturally depend-
coils
closely surrounding
the needle be employed to measure currents producing considerable deflections, the only
way
is to
graduate
it
empiri-
cally
or voltameter (68).
66 a.
consists of a fixed
and a movable
coil
when
is
reversed.
we must
coils.
To have
deflections
scale,
193
a a current
%=C
where
we
corresponds,
liave
\/ a,
is
sensitiveness
If the
of
bifilar
of
suspension,
oscillation
by-
is
the
of
movable coil.
Eor accurate measurements, the dynamometer requires
several precautions on account of the earth's magnetism,
elasticity of the torsion suspension, and the form of the
coils.
Tlie
of the
instrument
is for
alternat-
i.e.
for currents
to the
quite useless.
If the
two
coils are
An
in-
67.
Measurement oe Currents
in
Absolute Magnetic
when
made with
we employ
of the instrument,
measurements in a universally
yield comparable
and the
hori-
In order to express
intelligible unit
we may employ
194
From
force.
a measurement
Calling
manner.
11
the
r their
of the multiplier
Table 22);
a the angle of deflection of the needle
is,
of the
this
in magnetic measure
= -
tan a
2W'T
rT
and we may
call
^^ the
reduction-factor of magnetic
mea-
sure.
sec.~\
iM
V cos
a.
is
r'
dian,
tion,
and the
MT sin
earth's
a, in
by combining these
results.
with
'
of the coils
many
Weber
is
windings,
unit
by dividing the
-^
^.
total
195
by
by the number n
of the wire
27r, or
'
2}i-7r
The reduction-factor
it is
local influences,
all
may
it
be
such as iron
objects,
as possible
Example.
multiplier
is
19480
mm.
in
long,
*^'
24
Then r=
circular coils.
129-2 X 1-92
--
2 X 24 X 3-1416
In the cm.
g.
0-01645 tan
a.
tan
system r becomes
48
-,
1 G45 tan
a= ,-,^.
12-92,
a.
r= 0-192;
therefore
is
its dia-
meter.
It frequently happens that this condition is imperIf, as is generally
fulfilled
in coils of many windings.
fectly
formula
may
/^i j_
2/iff
_.
^'^
be
is
of
rectangular
corrected
__!__), where
^ ^
by
h
section,
writing,
is
the
the
instead
original
of
breadth and
rT
^--
h the
^'
snifdl
VOLTAMETER.
196
compared
must write
l+xf 2
sin^ <Pj
we must add
to the
tan
Here
f.
the distance
is
f,
between the north and south poles (the " centres of gravity
If I be not deterof northern and southern magnetism ").
mined by experiment, 0*85 of the whole length may be
taken in an ordinary needle as the distance between the
poles.
corrections are
small, will be
The
(55),
by a thread
we must
write
of
when
which the
T (l+@)
instead
of T.
of
68.
a current be measured
following rules
(1.)
rents
is
(2.)
The decomposition
in a given time
by
of the
same current in
law.)
different cur-
(Faraday's
VOLTAMETER.
(3.)
minute.
This quantity
0-565 mgr.
electrolytes
we employ
g.
of
Weber
called after
is
As
197
water per
the electro-
system 0*0565
grni.).
and
The
when
specific
metallic solutions
may
30%
of the
The
H^SO^.
volume of water.
The amount
by the time
We
will
Volume Voltameter.
In
volume of
(18) by the formula (Table
7)
V
^""1 + 0-003665
^^
'
7~60
Here
V
Vg
is
the
pressure
t
The
In this
liberated gas
is
and
fluid.
>S'
the density
barometer (20)
then
198
VOLTAMETER.
If the gas be
13*6 being the specific gravity of mercury.
have,
of
course,
only
II='b~h.
we
mercury
retained over
With
may
The
be regarded as saturated with aqueous vapour.
h of the vapour tension over the acid to the maximum
ratio
tension
is for
33%
27,
18,
1-13, 1-20, 1-25
or sp. gr.
^
To reduce
to the dry
0-9,
of acid
0-8, 0-7
cells,
we
require at least 3
Weight Voltameter.
may be determined by
weighing before and after the experiment
a small drying
weight of the decomposed water
apparatus, containing
concentrated
sidphuric
acid,
being
760 mm.
is
electrode.
By
to
each other.
we have
four
199
VOLTAMETER.
(1.)
The volume
(2.)
(3.)
(4.)
mixed gases
of
at 0
minute.
(In ordinary use
Jacohi.)
The weight of water decomposed in 1 minute.
The weight of copper deposited in 1 minute.
The Aveight of silver deposited in 1 minute.
in
The magnetic
unit (67)
tangent-
compass.
Very frequently
it is
For
in another.
this
mixed
gases,
For
1'99
mgm.
of cop)per, or 6'78
mgm.
of silver.
volume
of
Example.
Measurement of Current-Strength with the
Volumetric Water- Voltameter.
The duration of the current was =10 min., the volume of
liberated hydrogen
18'4
c.c.
= 745 mm.
It
would
is,
as above, //=
therefore, at 0
of mixed gases.
1'23
0"75 x 12
55
c.c.
758 -
(p.
197), have
REDUCTION-FACTOR OF A GALVANOMETER,
200
27-6
^^"^equently
'
we have 2*574
by Table
745
^^'^^ ''
+ 0-003665x14 760 =
^^' ^"^"^^"
c,c.
of
this
25^
69.
Galvanometer.
If the
unknown,
number
or
if
of windings
from
a galvanometer-coil be
of
its
cannot be calculated,
it will be necessary
For shortness' sake, we will
speak only of the tang-ent-compass, but if a sine-compass be
employed, it is only necessary to substitute sin a for tan a,
if a dynamometer {6Qa) v/a for tan a.
reduction-factot
to determine it expermientally.
I.
Tangent- compass of knoivn Bedudion-fador C' is
connected in the same circuit with the instrument to be
If the deflections of the two instruments are
examined.
respectively
u and
a^
then
^, tan a!
tan a
=G
or
tan a
.
sin
or
>
^, tan
s/
= the
time
m = amount
a
or,
num-
it
to absolute
measure
r tan a
is
201
REDUCTION-FACTOR OF A GALVANOMETER.
and especially
of the needle
when
must be observed
the variation
considerable the
is
mean
of the tangents
is
about 45.
As an example, we
measured
deflection
of 42'6.
10 tan 4:2-^
=2"('99; and a current which, with this tangent-
2-574
U J J-
25*74
G=
<j
<p,
<p
mm.* mgm."*
By means
III.
very
is
i=
, i being
to
current-strength,
electromotive force
e,
and
if
a,
The
of
cells
If
iv resistance.
and
lo
tan a
is
magnetic
units.
(See
Appendix A,
5.)
CwiU,
of course, give
202
DETERMINATION OF RESISTANCE.
The method
is
and
may
usually be
alone.
70.
Eheostat.
This problem
may
viz.
the
proof of equality between like resistances, and the determination of the ratio of the
means
amounts
of
When by
unequal ones.
we can
increase
for copy-
ing resistances.
Circuit.
current-strength.
circuit is formed,
vanometer
of the gal-
W, and a
when
is
its
of rheostat resist-
DETEKMINATION OF KESISTANCE.
This added rheostat resistance
203
is
resistance JF.
If the resistance of the rheostat cannot be altered
sufficiently small intervals,
but
as, for
resistance-coils,
by
instance, in Siemens's
a method of interpolation
of
described in (4(x).
The position of the
observed with the nearest resistances above and
below that required, and if the difference of deflection is
similar to that
needle
is
may
needle be
be taken as proportion
cCj
then
;r
IF
rheostat resistance
= iv, +
(w
IV J
this
'^
'
method of interpolation
Deflection 45-3
The method
only a
currents.
of substitution
Eh. 15
44-5
47-9
IF=U + f'l~f'l
47-9 - 44-5
if
is
cable
tv^;
=U-76.
is
galvanoscope
constant
to
prove
element
Any
the
is,
slight
equality
it
of
requires
the two
however, necessary (a
observation
and
is
taking the
In this
case,
would
however,
It is better, there-
204
DETERMINATION OF RESISTANCE.
fore, to
of a
means
it.
may
greater sensitiveness
by making
by " shunting " the galby resistance in the main
often be attained
II.
By
simiple Division
ential Galvanometer.
equal,
when,
if
The
of
tlie
resistances of
The equality
ential
of the
tions
and
thus,
when
two currents,
needle
is
known
therefore, are
The
coils.
to
undeflected.
The annexed
figure
ment
two
of resistances.
of the
coils
meter,
Avitli
The current
measure-
differential galvano-
ends
their
the
of
for
represents the
brought out.
cell
di\ddes
From
directions.
half
of
the
divided
current
is
led
jg_
sured,
stat R, uniting
pole of the
cell.
The amount
may
be employed here.
W.
normal position
The method of
is
interpolation
DETERMINATION OF EESISTANCE.
Testing the Differential Galvanometer.
that
first,
the needle
the
In
this
to possess
method
two pro-
when
This
uninfluenced.
is
assumed
is
20]
tested
is
by passing the
that
left
to
coils, as
Any
made
required correc-
exact fulfilment
of these conditions
in the figure
tions
may
are equal
be easily reversed.
when
and
sensitiveness
element.
Fig. 17.
Wlien
the resistance
to
be
measured
IS
ment.
is
the circuit of a
cell,
of the
not side by
The two
may
resistances
III.
By douUe
side,
traverse
and
them
to
in
opposite
be compared
206
DETERMINATION OF RESISTANCE.
Bridge.
With
if
proportion
a\h~c:d.
This follows immediately from the last
equations on
If,
Fig. 18.
184 by putting
p.
therefore,
= o.
undivided conductor
arrangement a
is
gives
the
greatest
sensitiveness
and
vice vei'sd.
The
of the
vol. cxlii.
Commutator.
We become independent of the equality of the resistances a and h which we have
assumed above by the method described under II.
The resistances
c and d are equal if when they are
^'S- ^^
unchanged.
tion is seen
How
by the
a commutator
figure.
is
DETERMINATION OF EESISTANCE.
Interpolation.
ance by
tlie
If
rheostat
When
207
is
a commutator
The
is
galvano-
increased
ings
by the
W.
This resistance
The
figures 1
The
is
then
desired resistance
is
then equal to
W+
^'-^^
it
avoid the
to
production
it
is
of
alterations
advisable, in using
of
the
may
be
used.
is
if
the resistance
of
if
deflection of
this
source
error is avoided,
first
the galvanometer.
208
DETERMINATION OF RESISTANCE.
Note.
This
key described
sists
is
is
completed an instant
effected
cell.
most readily
1864,
of three strips of thin brass, a a and a
353.
This cona a are connected
p.
;
J^
Ffi^
J^
L<^\^'^^VI
Lp
I<!
Fiff. 20.
with the battery and bridge at h b, and are brought into contact
by pressing the small block of gutta-percha c while a, also
separated from a by a little block of gutta-percha, connects the
sliding contact with the galvanometer by touching g. It is desirable to determine roughly the relation of the resistances with an
;
ordinary galvanoscope before employing a very delicate instruto save time and to avoid injury to the more delicate
one.
See also Brit. Assoc. Bejwrts, 1863, 1864, and 1867.
ment both
Trans.
to be
made
A
let
and
with a
Further,
cell.
%o
be re-
Fig. 21.
sensitive
In
galvanometer.
the
wires.
IV.
Two
resistances
coil
209
M N and
Let an induction
other.
and thence
resistances to be compared,
of the galvanometer.
If
Wound
many
resistances of
coils
of the extra
currents.
71.
of
measuring a resistance
measurement
I.
With
vanometer).
is
the
and a constant
to be made.
measured.
Let
it
be
One
i.
of the
resistances,
W^,
The other
resistance,
current-strength of
may
W^,
is
The required
i^.
is
is i^.
then be calculated
W^
For
^,
i^,
io,
we
i^
i^
or sines
The method
rarely
elements
is
dependent on
tlie
current-strength.
Further,
it
involves of necessity all the difficulties dependent on currentIt is the less exact the smaller the
measvirement (64, 05).
resistances to be compared and the greater their difference
p
210
(see 81).
:i^;
and
i^
-{-
W-y
where
(63,
No.
I.
is
4), since
the resistance
w^
the current-strength.
Example.
The observed
including
No
resistance to he
43 '6
^
^
Therefore /F,
II.
Ohm
^,
and
Metliocl
h represent
= 2-333
= 0'443
tangent = 0-952
66-8 tangent
resistance
The
One
2-333-0-443
0-952
^,,^,
x ^-^ = 2-94 Ohm.
3.333,0.3,^
two
resistances, of
In
the figure a
which the
when a and
the case
is
h together
consist of
a stretched (platinum or
silver)
in
can be
ratio
This
easily varied.
German
resist-
On
the wire
is
(platinum),
tact
a movable
con-
which
to
the
The
attached.
is
same
when
b is
Fig. 22.
Therefore ^7
are in the
advisable roughly to
by
purpose
it is
it
For
side.
convenient to join
211
to
a single wire,
meter wire
to
it
:W
ing screw.
The
positions of h
as in No. III.
and
R may be
reversed,
may
must
2 H- 5,
-[-
2,
it
the
into
circuit
-f-
5,
1 -H 2) are with-
tliick
Wires.
The
resistance of
short thick
may
conductors
be determined in
any
Let
nM
P^, a point ifj is sought at
^ ^
and
^ C
DE
nary
stretched
wire.
Taking a position
bridge
in the galvano-
212
But the
resist-
by a current
traversed
is
183),
(p.
when
i is
the current in
C, % that in
ADE
C,
we have
AP^.i==(AD + mQi'
AP, i=^{AD + DM,)i'
From which P^ P^ i = M^ M^
.
i'
III.
A
it
to
by
its
that motion.
The diminution
of arc of oscillation so
Xj
\
X'
then
is,
when
when
213
we wish
Or
if
to
of tlie
latter
X ->.
1
This method
is
The time
is
must
S.
be subtracted from
It
(Compare
X.
430.)
^0
'^+^l
^'^0
+ ^2
X'
0-1442^
with the
large
(X-X'):(X-X'):(X,-X')
Example.
When \ is
all obsei-vations.
coils closed
0-1442
= 0*0025
X =0-1435
through
Ohm
(?^,)
X,
= 0-0612
>.
=0-0978
be measured 0-0980 -
^^^^^J^
Then
w =1
The
0-1435-0-0978
0-1435-0-0612
0-0612-0-0025 ^,^,
zTTc;: = 0-342 Ohm.
0-0978-0-0025
is
0-0612-0-0025 ^^,orM
,
^''=l-^1435^(y^6r2 = ^-^^^^^^"^-
resistance of an electrolyte.
214
Eesistance of an Electrolyte.
72.
I.
When
the current
is
decomposed by
is to
electrodes.
(70,
I.)
that of
is
substitution
and
For
this
let
height (Horsford)
is
taken,
or, better,
filled to
it.
a certain
If the de-
a glass tube.
fluid
is
thus prepared
is
in a simple
included
column
of fluid
is
then observed
(and, if necessary,
202)
is
cell.
when
so
circuit
with
The
posi-
much
tion of the
needle
electrode
is
is
of the
an addition of rheostat
(in
an amount
of
same
movable
electrode.
If
is
we
Z;
where q
is
section in sq.
polarisa-
RESISTANCE OF AN ELECTROLYTE.
tion
may
On
be constant.
215
must not
and change
it
of the heating
is
thermometer.
of
tion
may
185).
(p.
be used
etc.,
in other
is
electrodes,
column
of fluid,
may
of gas
its
foil.
Wied. Ann.,
i.
510.)
and
rg
amounts
composed
to
I,
or
-=
if
V is the
volume
of the cone
3kV
II.
The
With Alternate
influence of polarisation
ance of an electrolyte
may
is
Currents.
p.
~.
sq.
cm.
;;;
KESISTANCE OF AN ELECTROLYTE.
216
in area.
The
For the
JD
it is
In order
first
to determine
sulphate of zinc)
is
obtained by Sec.
is
taken.
I.,
or a fluid of
It
is
known
most convenient
resistance of
which
is
sufficiently
According as vessels of
greater or less " mercury resistance " are to be measured, a
accurate quantitative analysis.
At temperature
is
may have
chosen to
fill
them, so
a suitable magnitude.
at 0 is of
Sulphuric Acid
K=
of 30-4
of 26-4
7o NaCl,
1-201
K= 0-00002015 + 0-00000045
{t
- 18)
K=
If
(^
- 18)
Acetic Acid
K=
Gr.= 1-187
0-00000456 + 0-00000012
of 16-6
Siemens's units,
its
shows a resistance
resistance capacity
7= WK.
of
If,
is
^-
then,
its
RESISTANCE OF AN ELECTROLYTE.
21
suitable (66a).
II.) is
used for
is
is
coil,
is
In the
J is
figure,
outer, i
the dynamometer
fluid,
the
which
is
known
metallic re-
units)
bridge
of
100
and
of
rheostat or a
(a
suitable coil
10
F the
measured
to be
sistance
resistance
A B C
between
mercury
are
resistances,
Fig. 26.
the
either a
stretched
which
also
we
refer for
wire
with
sliding
F and B.)
is
resistances
(See 66a.)
by an apparatus
with current interrupter, they may be detected by the aid of
Bell's telephone, which then takes the place of the dynamoIf the alternating currents are jiroduced
meter.
It is inserted in the
The use
of thin
EESISTANCE OF A BATTERY.
218
The
is
to be preferred.
73.
With
I.
The
through
galvanometer
additional resistance
convenient amount.
J, is
the Galvanometer.
65,
(64,
examined
66) and
is
completed
sufficient
then observed.
known amount
From
circuit,
included
is
i,
now measured,
to about half J.
first
observation
is
obtained
J -i
From
we deduct
and
first
the re-
and
also
experiment,
The accuracy
noted in (71,
of the result
I.),
and
is
is
affected
by the difficulties
by them when
especially affected
is
The
to be determined.
The
may be
neglected.
The
and
deflection of the
219
RESISTANCE OF A BATTERY.
including 50 units resistance, 55'7 ; tan= 1'466 ;
38-9; ^a?i = 0-807;
130
O'SOT
;r..50H130-60)j,j^^-^^^ = 98-0
therefore the resistance of the cell alone
II.
By
known
the aid
With
and
Galvanosco'pG
of a
W^=
units;
48 "0
units.
Rheostat,
and of a galvanoscoi^e of
rheostat,
battery of an even
in the following
resistance,
is
Let w^
noted.
and connecting
of galvanoscope, rheostat,
same
side, as
shown
a battery of four
in the annexed
resistance
Then the
ment is
resistance,
amount
We
the
of
iv,
all
zJi
the
zh
cells,
(viz.
wires).
~~j
;
of rheostat
take w^ as the
external
circuit.
w+
of
=
w^
-=
j^
w+
or
w=
4/;,
2iv..
w,^
cells
220
EESISTANCE OF A BATTERY.
By
III.
the
Method of Compensatio7i
of inconstant
cells
momentarily
closed.
current-strength
is
{Bcetz).
Since in this
the
resistances
only
circuit is
measurement of
impossible, we must have recourse to
case
Ah
IB
2i
known
upon which
sistance,
movable contact
are
re-
two
pieces.
is
ance
__
we
(in wliich
include the
to be measured,
of
battery,
less
another
e is
electromotive
force than B.
The batteries
must be connected with A by
their similar poles.
The
contact-pieces are
now moved
so
We
by a and
h.
and
h',
Tv
Proof.
circuit
with
two
different
resist-
we have
= ah ah
r
A a hE must
Calling this
by division
i,
1.
J^+b'
JF+h
andwi,
therefore
=
X.
Similarly
The
-.
W a'h-ah'
r.
a - a
,,,
we have
>
or
momentary
closure
of the circuit,
is
E and G
are amaliramated
RESISTANCE OF A BATTEEY.
221
and twisted together, and are dipped for an instant into the
cup and immediately withdrawn.
In order that the circuit
of e may not be closed alone, and so deflect the galvanoscope,
the end of the wire connected with E may be allowed to
project a little beyond the other.
It is obvious, from what has been said, that a must at
least
W^
0.
If
it
G may
become
must be
(Feussner).
E in
cell
In order to determine the resistance when the circuit is closed a shunt is applied to E in
such a way that it is thrown out of circuit by the key at A,
an instant before the connection of the cells with the rheostat
wire is made.
its
\_Note.
til
em
unclosed
state.
Copper
Tnins^
by
W = R-*a
By a magnet placed near it the needle of
may be kept near the position of rest and
the galvanoscope
the sensitiveness
so increased.
Here the
is
222
74.
Comparison of
Two Electromotive
Forces.
choose
that,
In
Daniell
reduced to
cell
zinc sulphate)
or
is
usually taken.
measurement of an electromotive
force is
its
In
cells
ceptible with
moderate
fluids
current -strength.
is
not per-
Elements with
chromic
acid
solutions
is
and
Rheostat.
circuit
we
much
is
extra resistance
deflection to
will call
E.
intercalated
convenient amount.
as
If necessary, as
will
reduce the
The second
electro-
the rheostat.
E_
w'
first
we have
223
This
not be neglected.
the preceding
article.
to
If,
may
coil),
the
may
II.
motive
and
E and
e,
and
E_
6
How we may
E
the ratio
is
If
two
electro-
W^
then
J. TV
i
.to'
Tor
this
is
itself.
this
we have simply
E_ J
i'
In this method we can employ only a sensitive galvanometer (tangent or sine compass with many windings [e.g.
Siemens's universal galvanometer (75) or a reflecting galvanometer
(66)]),
and
always
included
sufficiently large
resistance.
The only
III. Comparison hy Method of Compensation.
methods applicable to inconstant elements, of which the electromotive force varies with the current-strength,
is
to bring
is
very convenient, as
it
involves
224
compared.
experiment
is
galvanoscope
force
to be
G and
the electromotive
measured
vanometer
T.
E and
>S^
in the right,
and the
gal-
are so placed
As much
is
common
to
In
both
Pi.
rheostat resistance
EG
fTmust now be
to vanish,
intercalated
is %v.
of the
is
E_JW
iw
It follows
from
(63,
1.
is
and B) that
GE
zero.
is
is
of
is feebler.
Com;pensation.
In
this
ar-
rangement
with that
E of "a stronger
^'S- 30.
cells.
Let a
225
and
may
current
experiment this
is
Then
a- a
The proof
found in (73,
will be
>
III.)
also
The same
E
-=
relation holds
^
Compare
which
it is
h-h'
a-
Y\g. 31.
practicable.
For
if
is
The
factor
= C
C may
W+a+
simply
a.
E and
its
connect-
h'
by using
all
a=W^
E -e
or larger cell
in
un-
for e a
cell.
to
If,
is
E
Daniell's
wires
incj
If
E must
resistance
may
be practi-
this,'
a stronger
o
be used.
also
be used
for
the
226
75.
This instrument
sine-galvanometer
for
determining
electromotive
may
(65)
for
further
it
as a
contains arrangements
resistances,
forces
74, V.)
The accompanying
parts
versal
galvanometer.
galvanometer
coil
is
the
resistances
circular stretched
platinum wire.
I.,
III.,
screws, of
made under
I. is
in reality
the instrument).
simply connecting
circle.
II.
and IV,
and
W with one
II. are
of the
connected with a
II.
and
I.
on
p.
210,
if
227
is
&
and a are
as little un-
equal as possible.
I.
and
III.
e:c'
left
hand
in
= a: a'.
See (74, V.) and the figure there given, also the remarks
on the conditions under which the determination is practicable.
jVo/g.
(71, II.)
in this determination
the other.
The value of the bridge wire, as compared to the added resistance, is easily found by putting R and /F (Fig. 22) equal, when
be added at the end of
a=h. If then an additional resistance
228
and
b, and the current again brought to zero, we have a' = b' +
R' = a - h'. If this be repeated from each end, inequalities of the
wire will be eliminated, and R' will be equal to the length of wire
between the two opposite positions of the contact.
Eesistance- coils are easily made of covered German silver
wire, soldered at the ends to strong copper terminals, and, with
,
Trans.
76.
Absolute Measure.
IN
of unit-resistance.
current
J" in
Universally,
if
a circuit of resistance
the force
produces a
E=WJ.
We
must naturally
resistance
and
now
specify in
what units
current
is
Ohm
Such a measurement may be performed by the combinations mentioned under II. and III. (previous article), if we
measure not only relative but absolute current-strengths (67).
I.
Ohm's Metliod.
electromotive force
The
current -source
of
to be measured
with a rheostat and galvanometer.
We observe
is
which
the
is connected in circuit
229
W;
Then
E-=Jl
r- =
-^
J -i
C
cot
<p
cot
^'
To obtain exact
/,
the
is
The deviation
two
deflections together
90.
If
(See p. 222.)
Example.
The electromotive force of a Grove's element is to
be measured in Ohm's or British Association units of resistance,
and magnetic current -measure.
The reduction -factor of the
tangent-compass employed is, for magnetic units, 1"586.
We observe with the resistance
TF= 10 Ohm's,
w= 20 Ohm's,
The two
/=
1-586 X 0-9725
i= 1-586
1-5424
E= 1-54:24:
0-8326
force
..!?~^^oo^
- 0-8326
1-5424
,
0-5250
= 0-8326
is
the
tangent
is
taken
w W
E= C cot cot
<p
directly
from
a table.
The formula
is
<i>
more convenient
for calculation.
230
II.
Poggendorff^ s Metliod,
When
Fig.
29
is
(p.
rheostat B,
224).
if
W in the
is
E=WJ.
This method
is
(Compare
universally applicable.
direc-
tions, p. 224.)
77.
As by means
of a tangent-compass of
a galvanic current
may
magnetism
tangent -compass,
known dimensions
when
its
may
is
known
if
the
(67), so,
deflection
is
is
observed with
otherwise known.
I.
By
the
Voltameter.
"We pass the same current at once through a tangentcompass and a voltameter, and observe the deflection f of
the needle, and the quantity of the electrolyte decomposed
per minute (regard being had to the dkections in 67, 68).
If r be the mean radius, and n the number of coils of the
and, further, denoting by A the
tangent - galvanometer
;
number given
in the last
column
terrestrial
magnetism
is
T=
InrrA
m
tan
On
the one hand, namely, the current force i=A')n (68), and on
rT
the other
we
(p
=-
ta7i
^ (67).
By combining
these
two
results
; ; ;
231
we must
latter,
in
which
h, h,
insert in the
and
With
II.
denominator
The bifilar galvanometer (Weber) consists of a coil, suspended by two wires, which also serve to conduct the current.
The instrument is so placed that the plane of the coil is
brought into the magnetic meridian by the directing force of
the suspending threads,
Let
/be
the
sum
K the moment
is
is
If
number of coils
mean radius of the
the
r the
coils
(compare 67).
now
at the
galvanometer of f
the horizontal force of terrestrial magnetism
m_
/'tt'K
2n'!r
is
tan a
is
232
= /J
-f^
7,ir^
^'^'^
compare
<p,
f^^
9-
I.
coil
90 -
a,
the
moment
T cos
fi
The
directing force
time of oscillation
t,
a.
The moment
from
its
By
9, 10.)
position of rest
JJ
stn
=T
a,
-5-
sin a.
moment
restrial
is
inertia K, as
of torsion of ter-
magnetism we have
iT=
-777-
tan
a.
if
This formula, together with that for the tangent-galvanometer
gives
by multiplication
By employing
f,
by
division T^.
in both galvanometers,
of
tangent-compass be suspended by a
(55),
we must
write r (1
+ 0)
instead of r throughout.
The current
in one galvanometer
ought to
exert
no
233
138,
S.
1.)
With
III.
the Bifilar
(A.) If instead of
we
making use
of a tangent-galvanometer
let the
we
coils.
coil at a distance of a
bifilar
Let, further
f.
I
t
i
/V +
(ce
(rt^
is
^K
?-^)t
tan a
(1
+ 0)
tan
<p
assumed
to
taken.
If
p.
189).
measured,
mination of the
tion.
We
the deterof
oscilla-
and
meanings
for a,
<p,
a,
r,
234
= the
= 9810 mm.
50;
for latitude
finally, let
= the
elastic
directive
(see
below)
then
we have
ee'qm
tan a
T= V
To determine
{(X
+ r)f
+ 0)
(1
tan
hang
and
to it a
inertia is
-^-|^
so
thin that
so
small
is
The
D of the suspending
From
and
t,
wires
of the
"
to which, to obtain D,
"^
elastic
directive force
26 of the wires.
a given by
sin
a=fiT.
cos a.
produces a deflection
235
The
(1
^
+ &)
'
sin
(p
2fi
,
('
o,
?-)!
cos a,
^'
78.
If a current
a time which
is
it
This quantity
we
If
current
is
Let
= the
= the
a = the
c
i
is
the current.
This relation
may
236
etc.)
by arranging
needle
we
call the
damping k
known.
to be
logarithmic decrement
X=
the quantity of the current
is
Q^Cj^a.k
log. k,
tan
2-3026.
'^
Q=CThe quantity
of
a^k.
electricity
is
naturally obtained in
is
measured,
19.)
tionality
scale readings
no longer
subsists,
tion of equilibrium
the pendulum.
is
From an observed
is
deflection =
subtracted, where r
is
7i
scale-divi-
the distance
r"
of the scale
(Compare
also
79 and
85.)
METHODS OF MULTIPLICATION AND EECOIL.
237
79.
In measuring currents
with a damped
of short duration
In
this case,
the needle, there finally results a constantly maintained movement, exactly like that of a clock pendulum, which at each
friction
and, further,
it is
not import-
commencement
of the experiment.
It is
damping
is
oscillations
remain so small, or
obtains.
Method of Multiplication.
I.
clock
to
instant
when
it
passes
a second impulse
the
first,
the
so that
it
another impulse
first,
its
is
and
so on.
point
of
equilibrium,
is
reaches an amplitude at which that given by previous impulses is only just maintained, and of course this limit is
METHOD OF
238
is
RECOIL.
impulse, and
therefore
is
We may
oscillation a,
of
which
damping
or the logar-
/t
theory of
ithmic decrement
the
1\
--]
/,
^
(2'3026X.
,
Jc
tan-^
2-3026\
TT
^/
!For
i^k,
and we
have-
A k-l
"=2-71
The angular
velocity
a single impulse,
needle,
v,
communicated
being
to the needle
by
the
is
V=
II.
3fethod of Recoil.
is
the needle.
The needle
is set
in motion
by a
single impulse,
and
is
allowed to swing out, back, and out in the opposite direction, then, at
its
position of
since
first.
it
By
is
given
it
when
It
is
now allowed
METHOD OF
239
RECOIL.
when
next passes
it
When
position of equilibrium,
its
moment
and so
on.
the
form
grapliic-
diagram
annexed,
in
Fig. 33.
of
equilibrium of the
The establishment
hastened
if
the
first
damp-
If,
is.
The method
mean
of the
The
difference
the smaller
Then
arc.
damping
The arc
is
communicated by a
of oscillation
single impulse
is
when
as,
the damping
for
is
a'
\/ ab
comparison of
and
"^
resistances
amount;
(81).
By
_j 2-3026X
of,
lf
instance, in
taken account
"'^
for feeble
^^
the damping
damping
is
fully
240
2-3026X
may
be substituted.
single impulse,
of oscillation
velocity v
we must,
of the needle.
itself,
in addition,
communicated
know
the period
Then
k
t
"/ab
must
reversal,
ii.
80.
same revolving
coil (inductor).
M
^_
deflection to
and the
latter
to the required
com-
ponents, the ratio of the scale-readings gives the tangent of the angle
^
Fig. 34.
rotation
" induction
may be
-
of inclination.
a rotatable
An
the coil through 180, the plane of the coil both before and
241
com-
not
sufficient,
damp
the damping
is
increased
is
The narrow
used.
coils
by a copper casing
The
coil (or
of
the ratio
damper)
damping
assumed
same
is
the
is
to
for
be so broad that
both induction-
impulses.
employed, as
is
practicable.
LL, the
coils
By
is
turning on
by the
aid of a
meridian.
LL
The
axis
of the foot-screws,
exactly horizontal
level placed
when
it
is
observations
that
is,
upon
it
to
I.,
previous article,
The
is
vertically
is
The inductor
Induction hy the Horizontal Component.
coils
are placed
34
the
is,
that
placed as shown in Fig.
242
The
magnetic meridian.
till
by turning the
Jf
central foot-screw
in
is
coils
When
180.
vertical
is
is
now turned
this
is
meridian.
We
now make
before,
tan
J=r
'
The
sides.
axis
is
placed
and the
and the eye
the mirror, and perhaps a
mark {e.g. a window-bar) is
perpendicularly,
it.
On
it,
mark
A
coils,
when
magnetic
component
be
is
perpendicular to the
In a geometrical
may be
determined for the horizontal component by a compass with right-angled case held against the frame,
and for the perpendicular by the spirit-level.
In
inductor
Fig. 35.
to
wound
measured.
be employed, which
is
With
of
final
may
and limits
is
made on each
deflections
should
be
similar.
A slight error
provide against
ing
MM with
it
and to
the spirit-level.
for
5,
243
1853.
Comparison of
81.
Two
Magneto-Inductor.
Pushing
this
can be pushed.
through from one stop
of brass,
to the
coils
^:^mmmm^^
[p
differing
^'S- ^^
are so
motion
there
is
may
At each
easily
side
be found
by
experiment.
If the
it
inductor
is
the circuit
inversely proportional.
If
may
form part
of
or, better,
It is best to
244
(3.)
and
a^
^
Denoting,
"
i^,
is
included.
for
w^
Tlie arcs
The
arcs are
1)2.
a'
we have (compare
p.
b'
-y=^,
etc.,
by
i,
and
209)
w,
iv^
iI -
i,
?-j
%^
The observer must of course make sure that the movements of the inducing magnet do not affect the galvanometer-
A vertical
needle.
The advantage
we can
82.
is
ob-
of interpolation.
We
K the moment
t
its
time of oscillation
245
/ the sum
of the surfaces surrounded by the coils of tlie inductor in sq. mm. (83)
T the inducing component of the earth's magnetism (59)
a and h the two arcs of oscillation (p. 239), taking as unit an
arc equal in length to its radius
X = nat. log. a - nat. log. h, the natural logarithmic decrement
of the needle with closed circuit
>.'
that with interrupted circuit (compare 71, III.)
;
32/r
If
is
the
X-T^
moment
m\^tan-^^'
ah
of torsion
which a current
of unit-
w within the
coil,
if
(Appendix
moves with the angular velocity
it
in absolute measurement.
circuit
this
Since
to
is
Du
This
w
moment of
corresponds
to a current
^
D.
If
moment
of
is
the
moment
current
torsion
of
-^ u
of
the needle.
Now
this
latter
period
the
r=
of
period
of
52),
this displacement
by
^ the equation
^
oscillation
The
\-\ =-r
is
of
needle
the
connected with
D^
--^>, where
wK
damped needle.
damping
the
of
oscillation
without
r
If
is
is
(therefore
-TT
wK
=/
the
we have
the coils
\-\'
decrement
the logarithmic
now an
by
induction -impulse
246
^^,
of quantity (78)
wliicli
2,72
By
This value of
wK
4/r
a^
&^
^/ab
the other
we
find
On
^>.
h (79, II.),
we have
/\ - z tan-i
\b
'
is
X -k' gives
from which
'?
Very approximately,
metei's
p.
et scq.
d.
Gutting.
we may
Ges.
d.
and
W. Weber upon
JFiss.,
Bd. 10
take
Galvano-
Pogg. Ann.,
vi.
et seq.
83.
Bobbin of Wire.
For a wire not too thin the sum of the coil areas of
may be measured while winding it by determining
the number of coils and the length of the wire wound on.
I.
a bobbin
section
I
calling
= the
n = the number
of coils
(the breadth
is
of no
OF A BOBBIN OF
we have
for
247
WIIJE.
when
acting
on a distant object
II.
The
may
effective area of a
magnetic
its
moment when
Let
a
= the
and needle
r
= the mean
= the
proximately
the bobbin
then the
known
coil area
by the current
in
is
/= I ^ (a" + r')\
tan
a.
the short
the
ande
a amounts to
.,
{a'
The
1 9.
Tin
sin a.
terrestrial
When
.,.
+ r)^
magnetism
the needle
is
cos a, as
follows from
exerts the
moment
in equilibrium the
Appendix
of torsion
twoforces
follows.
rthe
factor (1
If at the
0) (55).
tangent -galvanometer of
is
passed through a
known dimensions
placed
at
248
it is
placed east
when
the
direction
a2
when
flows
it
that
actions
;
is
reversed by a commutator
/ of
the coils
"^n
is
o.z
li
n and
found
/fan
a,
+ fan a\
\fan
a^
J'
tan
a.
galvanometer.
If a^ is
a^,
is
measured on both
by
means
sides
The
torsion
of
is
here
of
no
consequence.
84.
With
I.
We
here measure
needle
is
is
repelled
to be determined.
graduated
circle.
slit
in the
249
into
reflected,
is
image
correct the
magnetic needle
of
reflected in a
slit,
must
at
The needle
by
adjustment
mark made on
mark
According to the strength of the potentials to be determay be made either with different
This angle
end).
Wlien
its
is
adjusted by rotating
base plate.
vertical (which
may
be
known
is
to
not affected by
rotation
its
the needle.
read
The
off.
potential
the
of
electricity
is
then pro-
portional to
\^sin
(p.
on
all sides
prevents
rotation
is
Observations
with
different
needles,
arm and
or
those
with
must be made
For this purpose,
needle,
250
to be
The
loss
of
by observations
In order that no
may
loss
it
is
With
II.
the
88, p. 497.)
vol.
The quadrant-electrometer
of
small
electrical
potentials, especially
of
measurement
differences
of
potential.
First of
all,
is
This charge
is
first
not constant.
is
now
of
is
to
i.e.
middle
its
line, is
Then
when the
is
severed
same
level,
do not
lie
at exactly the
It
two conductors
of a galvanic
battery)
of
different potential
are
now
{e.g.
the poles
QUANTITY OF ELECTRICITY IN A LEYDEN JAR.
251
48) which
nearly proportional to
is
by observ-
under
It is advisable
all
means
of a
is
commutator
then taken as
the deflection.
The
is
proportional
Comparison of Resistances.
If one
The
resistances to be
same process
is
The
The constancy
measurement must be proved.
resistances.
85.
of
the
Quantity of Electricity
I,
With
in
current
during
the
a Leyden Jar.
is
and the same battery may be compared by means of the sine - electrometer (84).
With respect to the " residual charge," i.e. that quantity of elecdifferent charges of one
252
it
may
II.
The
tance
is
it.
when
comparing with
the
sine -electrometer
the
potentials
by
to
If the
may be assumed
be approximately proportional to the potentials.
The
unit jar, of course, measures the quantity of electricity,
striking distances are not too small they
to
III.
The quantity
determined by
its
With
of
the Galvanometer.
in
electricity
battery
may
be
The danger of the discharge striking through the insulation of the wire is diminished by including in the circuit a great resistance, such as
galvanometer, as explained in (78).
a wet thread.
it must be
measured in
magnetic measure, contains in mm. mg. system 30 x lO^**, in
cm. grm. system 3x10^" electrostatic units.
(Compare App.
No. 11 and end of No. 14, and Table 28.)
electricity
to
absolute
electrostatic quantities,
of electricity, as
253
ELECTRICAL CAPACITY.
With
IV.
The depression
the
Air- TJiermometcr
column
of the
is
(Biess).
of fluid
by an
electrical
potential
its
assumed that the resistance of the wire in the thermometer bulb is very great
compared with that of the remainder of the circuit through
which the discharge is effected.
In this way quantities discharged from one and the
same Ley den jar or battery may be compared by the airbefore the discharge.
It is here
is
here proportional to
made, the air inside and outsome time in free communiWarming by radiation from the body or touching
thermometer
is
is left for
Electeical Capacity.
86.
in absolute
measure,
quantity of
electricity
and (85,
II. or III.)
the simplest
I.
condenser
two
(p
the Sine or
I.)
methods will be
is
the deflection
<p
is
observed.
now produced
we have
capacities,
Quadrant Electrometer.
is
when
other condenser
flection
of the following
Wiih
electrometer
One
is
observed.
first,
If x^
Then the
ELECTRICAL CAPACITY.
254
v^ sin
<p
'^ sin
<p'
\/ sin p.
^i
is
observations
The capacity
assumed
be
to
The
capacity of the electrometer itself may, however, be compared with that of one condenser and then inserted in the
calculation in a manner easily seen.
To this end the
very small compared with that of the condensers.
discharged by
when
itself,
is
observed.
The
calculation
is
it
to
the
is
suitable
alternations.
If
may
weak charges
are
II.
With
the Galvanometer.
III.
by the help
The condenser
absolute measure
motive
force.
of
is
may
a cell of
be measured in
known
electro-
charged by connecting
its
255
galvanometer
sensitive
known
of
reduction-
factor (78).
If
^ = the
(p.
the deflection
III.)
by the discharge
of the needle
the
of
condenser
= the period of oscillation of the needle (52) in seconds
we have
is
measure
a
cell
sec. ~^
cm.^ gm. 2
C = the
Daniell's
mm.^ mg.^
absolute measure
cell in
_l
Cia
TT
In order to have a
% is generally a very small number.
convenient unit, a capacity= 10"^^ in the mm. mg. system,
or
millionth part of
is
1 " Microfarad."
it
in
must be
mg. system by 9x10""
electrostatic units x
mm.
On
accuracy of measurement
only possible
is
if
the discharge of
way
the capacity
The connection
is
In this
of the
cell,
on the other
only
the
instant
before
Maxwell, Treatise on
87.
(1.)
the
Electricity,
discharge.
ii.
p.
(Compare
also
373.)
made use
of
SOME ASTRONOMICAL TERMS.
256
Azimuth
The
The
star.
arc of
star.
Great
circles
through the
ITour Angle
celestial equator
between
Declination
The arc
between the
star.
:
The geographical
latitude of the
place.
Parallactic Angle:
diurnal motion.
are reckoned
in the
(2.)
used
Sidereal
Time
The arc
between
24
Sidereal
hours.
Day
minations of a fixed
star.
1 sidereal
cul-
day = 1 mean
when
sidereal time.
its
257
THEODOLITE.
Eqimtion of Time
of the sun.
civil
is
from
88.
The
reckoned
day in
civil
Theodolite.
measured by
this
must be
vertical, the
Adjustment of
I.
The
axis
not change
is
its
vertical
when
two of the
This
first
foot-screws,
is
of all
and by
The
the use of these bringing the bubble to the centre.
instrument is then turned through 180, and if any change
has been produced in the position of the bubble half the
Finally,
difference is corrected by the aid of the foot-screws.
a rotation of 90
is
produced.
it
must be
first
time
repeated.
It will of
258
THEODOLITE.
may
when
level.
II.
when
for
is
known to be horizontal
when reversed end
end as
it
did before.
It can, of course, be
standing on them,
(h.)
Finally, the
it
If they
axis, the
is
to
here
III.
assumed.
dicular
to the
is
Perpen-
259
THEODOLITE.
the vertical axis
the telescope
is
its
If
on the horizontal axis.
the same object is again exactly on the cross-wires it shows
If there is any difference,
that there is no coUimation error.
half of
it
it
cross-wires,
and
Or
telescope to an object as
remain fixed and the telescope
reversed on its supports, and again directed to the same
object, which must still appear on the cross-wires.
The equality of the telescope pivots is here assumed.
(J))
after
directing
the
to
The instrument
(a.)
telescope
circle is
Determination of
adjusted as in
I.
to III.
The
is
artificial
to this
obtained.
Artificial Horizon.
ment, an
by adding 90
may
be placed in
This method
is
260
possible or
total reflecting
right-angled) prism.
{e.g.
89.
I.
From
of a Star.
The meridian
attains
its
position in
by
is
when
greatest
which the
of
circle
both to
vertical, it is easy
daily motion
its
a vertical circle.
the star
of a place is
observations on a
and
to
also
make
i.e.
it
the
touched
is
movement
of
tell
is
angle
but since
(Table 35, Nautical Almanac,
circles
the
declination
etc.)
star
is
known
an observation on one
For
if
S
(p
= the
= the
declination
6,
which
.
is
sm =
cos h
cos
<p
For the meridian, the vertical circle of the star and its hour
circle form at the time of the greatest elongation a right-angled
triangle with the hypotenuse 90 - ^, one side 90 -^, and the
angle
star
is
all.
The
more
suitable the
pole-star itself
is
there-
DETERMINATION OF THE MERIDIAN OF A PLACE.
or
261
II.
From Equal
The telescope of a
made vertical (88, I.)
theodolite of
is
the
is
read
horizontal
circle
off.
served after
its
that the
change of
alti-
tude should be as quick as possible at the time of observathe times are therefore chosen when the body is as far
and west as possible.
Wlien the sun is observed the vertical wire is placed in
the morning on the one edge, in the afternoon on the other,
The
while the horizontal w^ire touches, say, the upper edge.
bisecting line of the two positions, however, will not in
general pass exactly through the meridian on account of the
variation of the sun's declination between the observations,
but must be subject to a correction, which may amount to
some minutes.
tion
east
If
we
during
137)
this correction
(tan
<p
amounts
tan
d)
to
O'lQ
it
(tan
<p
- tan
line lies
in autumn.
b).
At
the solstices
The
its
instant at which a
highest point
is
body
found as follows
The
the zenith, and the body, are the angular points of a spherical
triangle which has the sides 90 - f, 90 - o, and 90 - A (A is the
262
90
-A
is
opposite to the
The
= sin
declination
h may become a
sin d
(p
cos
varies with
maximum
cos d cos s
5.
therefore
=
This
(sm f
s signifies
cos h
cos
(p
sin 8 cos s) cU
cos
<p
the hour angle at the time of the greatest altiis so small that cos s may be taken as
2'rs
and
1,
sin
Here
s=.r^'
is
measured
in degrees.
The
360
is
the variation of
i.e.
therefore during
III.
(B
^.
we have
in degrees, while
els
increases
called
e,
by 360
day.
is
Sun
at Noon.
For
W. must
sm A = ~^
sin
\<p
^)
0)
A=
'-
sin (p
edge and
90-5
263
circle, form a
and a perpen-
90.
ANY Place.
The geographical latitude or the altitude of the pole at
any place is most easily deduced from the observed altitude
of a heavenly body at its culmination.
If the meridian is
already known (89) the passage of the body over the meridian
is
is
followed
The observed
altitude
body
is
is
h,
according as
it
= 7i-90 +
or p
If
= A +90 -a
was
observed.
The measurements
made on
The
are
its
slow motion.
a solar altitude
instant
when
(87).
If,
its right
ascension
is
its
culmination
On
is
account
264
corrected
by leap year
is,
and
mean time
argument in the
which
t is
required
table, not
t,
is
the
is later,
all
time correspond-
If the sidereal
we must
therefore use as
Tc
noon
ing to the
further, since
is
found in Table
32.
the geographical longitude of the place reckoned in dewestward / may be taken from Table 30, or from
is
grees
a map.
(Compare
91.
Two
Watch
oe Clock.
tions of a heavenly
I.
For
cross -wires
used.
particular place
scope.
a distant
mark
is
tele-
It is still simpler
to use the
disap-
Hot chimneys
which
to
ob-
min.
= 0-06553
lirs.=
is
265
day.
II.
Two
mean
day.
It is
not here
An
termined.
most about 2
error of 1
sees, in error.
At
as observed at
is
tions, the
is
of the sun
92.
THE Sun.
For a place of known geographical longitude and latitude
the simplest
method
of
is
afforded
by
Those
is measured by the sextant or theodolite.
times are the most suitable for the observations in which
the ascending or descending motion of the sun is as rapid
which
as possible,
west.
is
directly east or
Let
(p
= the
the pole
266
I5t=
cos
t,
by the formula
sin
h- sin
cos
cos d
sin d
(p
of
In the spherical triangle, which has for its sides the zenith
its distance j; from the pole of the heavens,
and the distance a of the pole from the zenith, while a and p
enclose the hour angle 15^, we have
distance z of the body,
cos z
= COS
cos
From
is
p+
sin
p + a
sin
90,
\M.
cos
the
expression already
found as follows
it
made
directly on the
the case
may
is
The
mean
Some
The
is
times of
not uniform.
latitude of a place
0'01.
of the
may
map
to
The
about
Let
is
be the geographical
267
+ ooO
refers,
On
L.
is
365
Local time +
The
local time
i^^L +
of 3 minutes produces
a variation in
^
If the
degree.
town
When
p,
tables
is
in Bavaria,
must be put
Munich
for Z.
h,
found
mean
time.
nautical
of a
The
be
most
1000
{e.g.
and
added
of at
or railway clock
h,
k.
More exact
in Bremiker's Five-Figure
Instead of
The value
of
may
be made use
If
to
this
is
the right
is
of.
is
If the
are
observed at which a
268
mean
of tlie times
is
the
moment
{i.e.
If
<p
= the
= the
geographical latitude
38'2
As
is
means
to instrumental
{tan
this
<p
tan
method
p.
261)
5).
of time determination
rate,
is
observed each
On
true time
when
it
APPENDICES.
APPENDIX
A.
its
is,
nature as
magnitude requires
This unit
itself.
defined, for
measure
of
numerical expression
many kinds
(scale,
of
standard)
is
measurement
for its
some
at first arbitrary,
and may be
as, for
in-
such a
definition is impossible.
stance,
we
select
The introduction
first
Eor
very advantageous.
of the
number
on further consideration
it
of arbitrary
is
to
be also
by a moving body
is
universally proportional to
tlie
velocity
ABSOLUTE SYSTEM OF MEASUEEMENT.
270
t,
or
= Const,
ut
Should we
first
According to the
its
defini-
simplest form,
= ut.
Among
the
objects
to
which
preserved
elementary
quantities
and time.
of
The choice
is
is
of
primary units
of length, mass,
If,
and time
however, water
then necessarily
we have
is
and
for units
The term "absolute" was first applied in this manner to the unit of
magnetism defined by Gauss. In opposition to the
arbitrary practice, previously common, of taking the intensity at London as
unity, and making other observations merely relative to this, Gauss gave in
his Intensitas vis magneticm terrcstris ad mensuram ahsolutam rcvocata an
1
intensity of terrestrial
is, not a merely comparative) unit for terrestrial magnetic indeduced from the primary units of length, mass, and time only, and
applicable to magnetic quantities in general.
In a similar manner W. Weber,
in supplying the need of independent, and not merely comparative measures,
for the various electrical quantities, has retained the same designation.
The name "absolute measure" has now become a scientific phrase of
determinate meaning, and must therefore be unconditionally retained, although
it must be admitted that the term " derived measure " hits more exactly the
absolute (that
tensity,
mass
27l
kilo.
body
tion,
of
is,
mgr.,
of rota-
cv^
On
moment
account the
of rotation,
which
is
it
an axis
of rotation = ?n (7,
where by g we denote the acby gravity, measured in mm. and sec, which at
45=9806.^ To avoid confusion it is advisable,
celeration
latitude
when
of
it
the
as a
said, all
magnitudes are
a length divided
by
a time, a
volume
'
'
power,
its
nutritive or its
money
value,
is
proportional.
ABSOLUTE SYSTEM OF MEASUEEMENT.
272
out
we denote
"
a length by
The dimensions
/,
a time
of a space are
= l^,
by
t,
Throusih-
and a mass by m.
of a velocity
= It ~^,
of a
force mlt~^.
These
"
dimensions
" give
to
British Association.^
Jc"'
if
For
nth.
if
is
changed
The
k.
ment.
In fact mm. and mgrm. are inconveniently small units for many purposes,
and the magnetic and electrical measures derived from them have in some
cases this disadvantage to a tiresome extent.
Tliere is some advantage in this
respect in using cm. and grm. It must nevertheless be doubted whether it was
expedient to destroy the uniformity before existing in the absolute system.
For the disadvantages are but partially removed.
The resistances and
electromotive forces, for instance, which occur in practice are even in the cm.
many
On
the
other hand, the galvanic unit of current reaches such a magnitude that most
currents which are used are expressed as only small fractions of it.
And if
the physics of the future has more to do with the absolute numbers of atoms
than we have at present, even the cubic mm. would be inconveniently large.
Every consistent system of measurement must give rise to awkward numbers.
However, the gramme is more convenient to have to do with than the
mgrm., and the most easily understood, and frequently occurring magnitudes of mechanics, force, work,
expressed in
much more
moment
of inertia,
and
The
it is
275
min. in
expressed in
1000^^
""
10000
(Compare
"
Table 28.)
As
(1.)
length
is
Dimensions =
used.
Unit- volume
(2.)
is
/^.
Dimensions = P.
An
(3.)
subtends
it
the unit of
sions
that
of
If
(5.)
therefore, is
Dimen-
to the radius.
is
The unit
velocity, therefore,
time.
h=
t,
is
That angle,
a point
which
Dimensions =
unit
is
i-G-
Velocity u
divided by
time
is,
y= 1,
(4.)
is
angle
r^
The
The
9-806 m.
Dimensions = -^
mm.
sec."" or
Mechanical Measures.
(G.)
velocity
Force.
By an
u communicated by the
Jet
in time
t,
is
-C
-^
the constant
Taking
C= 1,
and so
ABSOLUTE MECHANICAL MEASUKE.
274
giving the law
also=
1,
its
v,
m, and k
t,
we have
Unit of force that force which in nnit time comDimenmunicates unit velocity to a unit mass.
;
sions
The
= hnt~''^.
on
exerted
force
9806^^^^^^^^?^-
mgr. by the
Work
attraction
= 0-9806^^^?^.
sec'
sec."
(7.)
earth's
Work
application of a force
when
will be performed
is
moved by
the point of
it.
distance.
In raising
9806
grm.
^^^IS^-,
980-6 x 100
= 98060 'J^L^:^
=
is
sec.
sec."
performed.
we
also a unit
here obtained
is
is
equivalent
(8.)
tion
Moment of Rotation.
Taking
the product of a
as
leverage
sec.
(that
is,
its
the
moment
of rota-
from
distance
axis
of
rotation),
P=Jd; then
The unit
force
of
moment
acting
Dimensions, l-mt~^.
given by unit
of rotation is
through
lever
of
unit -length.
275
(9.)
If a body,
axis,
tion
exerted on
is
We
moment
of rota-
it
p,
always proportional to
is
^.
P
=
i) as the direc9
tive force, our unit of angular measure being that angle sub-
tending an
equal
arc
to
radius
the
(=57'296 = arcual
unit).
The unit
brium
is
The dimensions
of
an arc by a
is
rngr.
pension to
and
of
moment
directive force of a
the mass
for the
as those of the
a simple number.
is
The
same
rotation, since
radius,
are the
moment
of equili-
moment
Moment of
(10.)
may be taken
(p
Inertia.
as
= sin
Taking
the
Z" of a mass
K= Ihn,
or, if
The unit
at
of
the distance
moment
from
<p^lm 9806
(p
moment
its
<p,
of inertia
axis of rotation,
K= %lhn
then
of inertia is represented
of rotation.
sin
from
by a
an' axis
Dimensions = Ihn.
of
length
K=m
Moment
oscillation
K
= -^
as
mm.
mgr.
of inertia
for
cr"
,^
the
dimensions
themselves
show, since
Pm
276
Electrostatic Measure.
(11.)
e,
Electrical Quantity.
tance
/,
simplest form,
Unit
and
at the dis-
Zj
= -^,
in
1,
and
so giving the
quantity
of electrical
-^
of
unit selected.
its
quantities of electricity,
repel each
law
Two
as concentrated in points,
e, considered
is
Dimensions = /im^"^~^.
unit force.
{lm^t~'^,
units
\/l^mt-''
of a quantity of electricity in
mechanical
ihn'-r^-
When we have
to
do with
variation of which in
given direction.
electricity e
several
on a point distant
quantities
e^,
e.^,
is
given by y;
l^,
l^.
from them
is
j-
j-
The
Dimensions = flmH~^.
on a
there are
point distant
if
a point
at
unit distance.
277
Electrostatic Capadty.
electricity e
may
In
V is
the conductor.
e
be in equilibrio on a conductor
The potential
is
equal on
it
all
must
l)e
points of
=x
.V.
The
x^~
ratio
is
The capacity
quantity of electricity
unit potential
by unit quantity
charged
is
of electricity, therefore,
Dimensions =
/.
Magnetic Measure.
(14.)
Pole.
Exactly
of the interaction of
free
magnetism
(or
points, of strengths
fju
yu.
and
/x')
at the distance
/,
k=
and
so obtain as
Unit quantity
of
free
magnetism
(or
strength of
at
exerts
unit distance.
Dimensions = lhnH~^.
Each
(15.) Magnetism of Beer, or Magnetic Moment.
magnet has equal quantities of free positive and negative
magnetism.
The sunplest bar-magnet would consist of two
opposite poles of the nature of points, and of equal strength.
If fM be the quantity of magnetism which is contained in
each pole, and I the distance between them, the action of the
bar at a distance will be proportional to l/n. Taking l/x as the
magnetic moment, or, shortly, as the magnetism of the bar,
278
magnet which
quantity
strength),
the
sents
consists
of
unit
free
strength
of
bar-magnet.
of
Dimensions, BmH~^.
The
of the
ratio
milligrammes
called
is
the specific
It
mm.t mgi
sec."^
for
bars
to
mass in
magnetism of a bar.
at most about 1000
cmi
gm.* sec."^
a magnetic pole
is
(a.)
fjf
lies in
(first
distance from
tlie
being L.
fi
exerts a force
/j,
fjb/jb
Ty^jyra'
direction
rr-g
j^
(
and the
"^^^
pole
is
"^"A(-4r(-4)j
but
Ifi is
2LI
""
L
k
m,J^^-.^{^-L.)
(^^ir
If the distance
2y2
may
simply
be neglected
in
comparison with
1,
I,
so
that
we have
{l>)
is
fx
279
through
its
net.
The
force
If
the distance
of the
'
^^^'^
/x
Both
to the parallelogram
of
/^
mag-
/j,
forces,
_
=
fj'/j''
lixfj!
Mfjf
jL/
If
we
by a short magnetic
and of
//.'
the length
l',
/jf,
2/i;
-^
= Z;/'
ujDon
it.
Since
moment
the magnetic
is
yu.'/'
of
moment
rotation
of rotation
moment
exerted on
(great
it
of
by
compared with
In the
of
M, and
Jirst position,
when M'
.
at right angles to
In the second
it,
P=
position, that
perpendicular to M, and
is
lies in
^'^^
2 ~p^'
is,
when M'
lies
on the
with M,
MM'
^- U
'
of bar-magnetism inde-
280
the
moment
If the deflected
of rotation -p.
moment
with the
<p
Ordinarily, the positions of these " poles " are not exactly
known, on account
which (59,
of
in case a distance
II.),
I'
employed
ciable,
at
we must
is
is
not
mappre-
in order to eliminate
it.
At any
(16.) Intensity of Terrestrial Magnetic Force.
point of the earth's surface a magnetic pole is acted on by
a force proportional to the strength
is
/*
of the pole.
We
take
or, shortly, as
the in-
T is
Horizontal intensity
an ordinary needle.
of brevity
we
will confine
moment
yu.
is
moment
of
^ixT - =^dT=MT,\i
the
needle.
We
fju
have
therefore
As
281
of unit
moment
a unit
wliicli exerts
of rotation
on a bar
MT
MT
tion
t,
and moment
product
(59,
MT
of
of
inertia
I.)
obtained as follows
The magnet
If
9 be the
is
first
M' and
is
is
mametic
equal to the
M'T
sin
distance L.
moment
which
is
to the needle, of
is
by another magnet
rotation
of
72
cos
<p,
(p
Therefore
force.
2 71/ /
31
an equation which
The magnitude
is
there denoted
by
the magnet.
In the
"
second position
we
to 2
mm.
"
tlie
factor
dis-
have--|Z^.
amount
terrestrial
(i.e.
magnetism
Let a thin magnetic bar have a length of 100 mm. (10 cm.) and
Aveigh
Its
moment
of inertia therefore
ABSOLUTE GALVANIC MEASUEE.
282
10000-100'
^^
isir=
X
Qoo
ooQnnnA mm. 2 gm, /lO-lO'
= 8330000
z-^
= 83-3cm.
grm.)
(
of oscillation
sec, "^
mgrm.^
sec. "^).
is
/8330000
,
^
(or 3-14
'^*/ili7-'=^"^V"T0-2^
/83-3\
/-^)= 6-4
,
sec.
Galvanic Measure.
(17.)
Current -Strength
Mechanical Pleasure.
is
The
nu-
of electricity (p.
Unit
of
current-strength
that current
is
by which,
through a section
is
of
Dimensions =
the circuit.
such a measurement
but
we make
employing mostly
(18.)
its
Unit
is
Here
the
chemical action.
If
we knew
the absolute
number
mined
as that
we do not know
283
and hence, not only on units of mass, length, and time, but
on an arbitrary quantity of the substance employed.
Since
the decomposition of equivalent weights
is
proportional,
and
we employ
It is customary in practice to
reckon the amount of decomposition either in mgr. of water
or in
of
c.c.
Compare
mixed
measured
gases,
at
(68).
Cunxnt-Mcasure.li we con-
and
of
distance
strength
-i
L from the
we
to its direction,
on a quantity
pole, to be
simplest form,
Unit
Z:
free
magnetism, at a
by the
by the current
on the
of
fx
or,
= Const. ^
conversely,
we have h = ^, and
its
as
under
For
- =
^=
Jc.L^
force x lensfth
Hi
magnet pole
Instead of this
Dimensions, IhnH'^.
we may
Imt'^ x
^-^
l^m^t
linfit-'i.
in a circle of
moment
of rotation
j^ = ^-
= 100 mm.
T=2
284
needle
the
100x2
an angle of 45.
tlirouorh
,
01Q mm.^
xl = 3-18
'
20x3-14
cm.i grm.*
mc;rm.=
sec.
-if
M
\
tT
Then i=
-r
tan<p
10x0-2
.^_^
^c-rr = 0'0318
20x3-14
^rr
sec.
Two
Lastly,
we have
or experienced
its
by
it, it
moment /
i,
where
is
we may
is of
its
plane,
the magnitude of
As
course employed.
In other words,
say
magnets
like a short
magnetic
The above
rule
circular current
axis.
may
which
acts
on a magnetic pole
fi
lying in
its
i,
I,
and the distance of the poles from the plane of the circle Z.
Each small portion of the circle of length \ exerts the force
Z2 + l^
from the centre
of the circle,
their
We
The component
resulting from
is
285
be
^KT
TT^i
{L +
where
is
nrV^
the surface
current.
P-
may
-^
take
therefore
magnet
of
as the
be neglected in com-
p-
may
surrounded by the
l-)i
that
is,
magnetic moment
magnetic
the cur/'i.
moment
We
of the
The quantity
of electricity
The
is
in the
in one second
0*00942
circuit.
3'10^*^.
(20.)
magnitude
:
is
to the direction of T.
plane of
and
electromotive force
to the length
/,
Taking simply
This
is
moved
with a velocity
e is
w.
By
this
motion an
= lTu, we have
as
ABSOLUTE ELECTKOMOTIVE FORCE.
2 86
Dimensions,
netic force.
is
and
to the
mag-
I'^iiiH"^.
4500000
sec. ~
mm
msr. 2
'^
^
sec.
100
0-45
100
= 4500
cm.^ gm.*
^.
The electromotive
grm.), or about
" volt."
-|
of that
of
10^^
or
10^ (cm.
cell, is
termed a
(mm. mgm.)
a Daniell's
charged by 1
volt, contains a
10 mm.t mgm.2
1 farad.
force
when
sec."-^
microfarad
is
tliis.
We
The wire
change of plane
and
and therefore
rotation.
of the
Trans.
2rVr
>
where r = radius of
(Compare
coil,
and
time of
287
ABSOLUTE RESISTANCE.
Finally, the
same unit
We
force (75)
= -, we have
In
force,
As
and take
unit the
which
of a conductor, in
resistance
Dimensions =
^
b or
resistance
lt~^.
electromotive force
current
l^vi'H~
,i
-f
,^
= i't~
.
.
l^m-t~'-
this
1 met. long,
lO'^
mm.
The
cm.
sec.""^).
mm.
sec. ~^ or earth
this
name
name
"
Ohm "
quadrant second.
is
equal to 1'0493
Siemens's units.
The
resistance, or quotient of
an electromotive force by
288
a current-strength,
may
so physically conceived.
the resistance of a
straight
wire
of
For instance,
unit -length
is
that
velocity with
field,
produce in
it
by a
Connection
WorJc.
The
first
shown by the
action receives
measure.
its
The quantity
a conductor of resistance
or
eit,
where
current
is
in time
employment
of this
evolved by a current
t,
is
in
proportional to ihot,
But by
is,
as expressed
289
DETEEMINATION OF WAVE-LENGTH.
magnet.
But as the law of induction (p. 286) asserts that ku is
the electromotive force e in absolute measure, we have also for
the Avork performed, kiut eit = iSd.
Now
exists in the
unit of work.
or, in
We may
other words,
now
its interior
The unit
work.
manner
work
in unit time.
Or the
Unit
of
resistance
is
the resistance
of
that con-
APPENDIX
B.
other causes,
scale to
son.
lines,
290
DETERMINATION OF WAVE-LENGTH.
directly
by
described in (42).
diffraction, as
unknown
is
known
easily be determined
mapped
are
known
of
laid
rays
of
may
intermediate rays
however,
If,
number
lines
I.
If,
4).
be deter-
have been
two
The known
lines are also laid down on a wavedown one side of the sheet. Perpendiculars are
then erected on the known lines of both scales, and a curve
paper.^
length scale
new
where
Line
it
cuts the
with regard to
the wave-length.
it is
tions
on the spectroscope
by the readings
scale, or
of the
line,
r"2
r^
The following example from Dr. Watt's " Index of Spectra "
which the wave-lengths of almost all known lines are given)
(in
will
make
"
One of
the brightest
may
be obtained of Messrs.
291
DETERMINATION OF WAVE-LENGTH.
14-38 and 15-27, while, when the wires were brought on the
Bessemer line, the reading was 14"81. Putting then n^=^ 15'27,
X^ = 5337, ?i^ = 14-38,
5378, and ?^^ = 14-81, we find for \ the
\=
value 5358."
If the line
lies,
lines,
but on the
them
% -\
K
and
if
more refrangible
'
% -^
>
^2- ^'
\-Jh
%_-n.
shown
that in spectroscopes
the dispersion
is
nearly proportional to
We
known by
Xj-^-X-^
\'''^-\~'^ ::
it
\-n^
n^-i\-
lines,
obtained.
Inverse fourth power
of wave-length
Frauuhofer Lines.
B
C
D
E
F
G
mm.
as unit.
4-454
5-423
8-293
12-965
18-052
29-453
41-622
Billions.
Differences
969
2 870
4 672
5 087
11 401
12 169
THOMSON'S ELECTROMETEES.
292jSfoU.
The
")
by a
scale
1873.)
APPENDIX
C.
to that
which
is to
In
be measured.
electrified
plane
is
kept
Portalle Electrometer
TJie
"
consists
of
light
disc
or
" of
Opposed
object of
and the
If,
when
the jar
is
negatively charged,
with earth, the reading of the micrometer-screw be D, and when the disc is connected with a
body of potential F, the reading be D'
disc connected
V= {D' - D)
in
which
c is
c,
V be
ment.
If
THE QUADEANT-ELEGTEOMETEE.
293
may
units.
will
measure a
The quadrant-electrometer
will
indicate
Daniell's
"needle,"
is
much more
difference of tension
of
and
sensitive,
xoo^^^
^^^^^
o^ ^
cell.
by the
is
turned
till
the attraction
is
balanced
magnets.
If
V be
proportional to
{V^-
V.)
and where
V +V
-^
is
V~\
Y'+
-
more
sensitive
the instrument,
quantitative measurements
"
by that
of the needle.
For
a
replenisher " at a constant value indicated by an attached
" gauge-electrometer,"
of the scale
l)y
determined
CONDENSERS OR ACCUMULATORS.
294
either
known
par.
electrometer, or
by a
cell.
Clark, p. 111.)
APPENDIX
D.
Condensers or Accumulators.
The electromotive
force, or potential
of a battery,
may
an accumulator
jar, or
As
analogous arrangement.
of great capacity
is
required to receive a
it
tin-foil, alternately
number
of sheets of
is
the product of
by
which it is charged, or Q = EG.
This quantity may be
measured by discharging the condenser through a sensitive
its electrostatic
galvanometer,
capacity
when
the
Q^^
of the discharge is
sin
^6 = EC.-'
(1.)
needle, which
may
be the case
we may
if its
write,
if
moment
of inertia be considerable.
Q=~[i + l\)e.
If
295
CONDENSEES OE ACCUMULATOES,
the resistance
employed
to
of the battery
as
H is very
may
sometimes be neglected.)
Then (69, III.; 76, I.), with unit deflection
large these
E = En,
And
combining
this
with equation
2f
n
C = =,
vE
With
(79,
I.)
(2.)
(1)
sin
we
obtain
,
6.
the latter
required.
is
From
the electric
"
absorption
"
of the condenser
Latimer Clark,
1867,
If
p.
(See J.
120;
p.
1863,
et scq.
p.
144;
484.)
way
at each reversal,
and a regular
if
be
-pj^,
where
is
The strength
and
if
^=
^^^jr-,
and
R = j-^,
so that the
condenser
differential
galvanometer.
(J.
Clerk
MEASUEEMENT OF RESISTANCE.
296
APPENDIX
E.
By
current be
difference
(J. C.
Maxwell, 353.)
two ends.
of potential of the
If
is
proportional to
may
its
resistance.
be measured by the
quadrant-electrometer.
B,
11
i?3
P.
{P-P^, (P^-P^),
If
etc.,
be the
B,:B^: B,-{P-P)
II.
(P,
- P,)
{P,-P:).
stone's bridge,
vanometer.
of allowing
as a
Wheat-
no current
to pass
through
it.
If the resistance be so great that no current meaby a galvanometer can be forced through it, the
quantity of electricity which passes in a certain time may be
accumulated in a condenser, and measured by discharge
III.
surable
through a galvanometer
(p.
294).
if
This quantity
is
inversely
of cables.)
IV.
gradually to discharge
itself
297
MEASUEEMENT OF RESISTANCE.
may he
we have
electrometer (which
after
time
t,
^^
and
iu arbitrary units),
E that
{log,
Eo -
log,
E)'
the condenser itself is not perfectly insulated, two experiments must he made, in one of which the condenser is disIf B^ be the resistance
charged by its own leakage alone.
of the condenser and
alone,
and
that
condenser
R'
the
of
As
of the latter is
R~R'~ r;
V. This method
is
of telegraphic cables.
increase in the
same
much used
ratio
with
time in which
it
The cable itself is used as the concapacity and the area of its coating
its
is
-|)
of its
a series of
sists of
100
resistance-coils of
100 Ohms
each.
Each
of the junctions
One
cable,
which we may
call
loose wire,
100.
is
which
shifted
is
falls,
from
so as to
potential
E be
is
If
equal to that of each successive block.
c that to which it has faUeu
in time
t,
it
log
(Latimer
298
claek's potentiometer.
APPENDIX
P.
and
I.
II. are
merely
Let
^ be
compared.
If
\C"
a wire
uniform
of
ah,
the
wiU.
fall
resistance
^ potential
continuously from 5
G^
\^
-C^)
'
to
^^g- ^^-
it is
a.
then,
If,
e^
with
, its
potential
equal to
is
no current will
flow.
included in the
This
is
circuit.
h^
in ah the
they be connected
indicated
by a galvanoscope
If,
point
current
falls
passes,
now, another
difference
cell
be simi-
which
But since
and, when ho
by that
of ah.
uniformly from a to
the
e^ if
if
the potential
we
G^,
its
by
poles be united
G.
&,
of potentials
of
the
poles
measures the electromotive force of a battery, the electromotive forces of e^ and e.^ will be proportional to the resistances ab^ and
practically
a&2' or,
convenient arrangement
is
to
make
ah^
299
SIEMENS'S PYEOMETEE.
stretched
(71,
fine
and
II.),
calating];
o
standard
cell
be equal to 1
the
give
required
say,
of,
volt, (see
bridge
G^ to zero by inter-
suitably"
will
the Wheatstone
&,
If,'
100
then, ah^ be
'
parts,
and the
electromotive
force
e^
at
once in
absolute
measure.
106
It
J.
is
p.
is
Appendix
(V.)
APPENDIX
a.
The
much more
and
for this
it is
made
of platinum-silver, gold-silver, or
preference
to
the
pure metals.
Dr. C.
German
silver,
W. Siemens
in
has
taken advantage of this variation of resistance for thermometric and pyrometric purposes.
meter.
The two
coils
flows
down one
are connected
and
is
SIEMENS'S PYKOMETEE.
300
coil,
Both
II.)
for
Platinum
Copper
Iron
?-
And Dr. Siemens has proved that this holds good for platinum
through a range of 1000.
For low temperatures the
coil
is
etc., it
generally of iron or
consists of a platinum
may
be
left
it
continuously
if
hotter
it
and
known
if
7 be the
resistance,
and
and C
and
MEASUEEMENT OF
are
the volumes
(C+y) r={C' + j)
of
r',
may
gas liberated in
given time
and
VV may be measured in
ture and pressure
301
TIME.
any arbitrary
be neglected
if
units,
and tempera-
The
may
rubber tubes.
By
Royal
Society,
APPENDIX
J. C.
{Proceedings
Maxwell,
par. 360.)
H.
ments
it is
when
The
I.
is
arranged that a
circuit,
a Galvanometer.
It
measured.
metal radial
made
strip,
which
M. Schneebeli
{Pogg. Ann.,
cxhii. p.
MEASUEEMENT OF
302
steel fixed in the
same
of the pendulum.
TIME.
duration
of
contact was
The
without shock.
inversely proportional to
fall
H of the
the
pendulum, and
If the resistance
of the circuit
by formula
(1),
()
The
II.
Et
may
be found
2nT
sin
mined
Appendix D.
18).
6.
is
may be
deter-
ing tuning-fork.
and
if
number
of revolutions of
tlie
mt
360w
a connection which
is
by
MEASUKEMENT OF
will be
produced in
which may
tlie
303
TIME.
by piercing a revolving
by marking a black -varnished
metallic disc, or by making a brown dot on a paper preA smaller spark is
pared with potassic iodide and starch.
This method has been applied
also produced by closure.
register
to
its
itself
either
spark, or
it
its
bullet,
course.
which
successively
If the velocity of
III.
MM.
vol. xl. p.
78)
EESISTANCE OF MERCUEY.
304
APPENDIX
I.
ance
mercury
it
contains,
and
o-
its
W in Siemens's units at
sp. gr.
(=13'557),
its resist-
0 C. is
must
correct
by multiplication by
'^
"^
Va where a
,
is
(Compare
1862.)
TABLES.
TABLE
1.
Density of Bodies.
and Fluid
(a) Solid
Aluminium
Lead
Bronze
2-6
11-3
CclS L
7-65
7-8
wire
,,
Cast steel
Ivory
Copper
Bodies.
Wood, pine
8-6
7-75
7-5
Iron, malleable
J J
Ice at 0 .
Water at 0
Water at 15
Brass
German
Ether at 15"
Alcohol at 15
Silver
Platinum
Wax
Aniline at 15
Benzol at 15
Silver
1-9
Zinc
Chloroform atl 5 1
Glass,
crown
2-7
Tin
Gold
flint
3-5
Calcspar
19-3
Cork
Sulphur
Glacial Acetic
Acid at 15
1
Glycerine at 15 1
15
Olive Oil at
Mercury at 0 13
Bisulphide
of
Carbon at 15 1
Wood, ebony
,
beech
oak
,,
1-2
0-7
0-75
Quartz
Bismuth
Spirits of Turpentine at 15
(b)
At
Air
Oxygen
Nitrogen
Hydrogen
....
....
....
.
Carbonic dioxide
Mixed gases from electrolysis
of water
Aqueous vapour
9167
99988
99915
7202
7938
023
884
499
053
27
915
596
27
872
Gaseous Bodies.
Compared
tn air at similar
0-0012928
0-0014293
0-0012557
0-00008954
0-0019767
1-00000
1-10563
0-97137
0-06926
1-52910
0-0005361
0-41472
0-6230
TABLE
2.
0-75
58 -4
0.-80
46-3
35-6
26-1
17-7
10-0
0-85
0-90
0-95
1-00
56-7
42-5
30-0
18-9
8-9
0-0
Cartier
Sp,
43-0
33-6
25-2
17-7
11-0
1
1
-5
2-0
6
6
o-o
o-o
15-4
28-3
39-2
48-6
56-7
63-7
70-0
75-6
80-5
85-0
20-0
40-0
60-0
80-0
100-0
120-0
140-0
160-0
180
200-0
306
TABLES.
TABLE
3.
4.
The
reckoned as an-
hydrous.
Id the case of Alcohol only what
is
Specific Gravity.
Percentage
Per
is
given
spirit.
centage
Contents.
Contents.
kho.
KCl.
NH3.
NH4CI.
0-999
0-999
0-999
0-999
0-999
0-999
0-999
0-999
1-045
1-032
1-031
1-040
1-045
1-036
0-978
1-015
10
1-092
1-065
1-072
0-958
1-030
10
15
1-141
1-099
1-099
1-141
1-109
0-941
1-044
15
20
1-191
1-135
1-135
1-192
0-924
1-058
20
25
1-242 (1-172)
1-245
0-910
1-073
30
1-295
1-300
0-897
30
35
1-349
1-358
0-885
35
40
1-406
1-417
40
45
1-466
1-479
45
50
1-528
1-543
50
25
307
TABLES.
TABLE
SContmiied.
Specific Gravity.
Percentage
Percentage
Contents.
Con-
NaHO.
NaCl.
CaCl^.
BaCl^.
MgSO^.
tents.
0-999
0-999
0-999
0-999
0-999
0-999
0-999
0-999
1-056
1-035
1-032
1-045
1-052
1-042
1-045
1-051
10
1-111
1-072
1-067
1-092
1-105
1-086
1-094
1-105
10
15
1-166
1-110
1-103
(1-159) 1-133
1-148
1-161
15
20
-222
1-150
1-141
1-181
1-205
1-221
20
25
1-277
1-191
1-181
1-232
1-269
1 -284
25
30
1-333
1-223
1-286
30
35
1-387
1-267
1-343
35
40
1-442
1-314
1-402
40
45
1-496
1-365
45
50
1-548
1-417
50
Specific Gravity.
Percentage
Per-
centage
Contents.
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
H,SO,.
HNO3.
HCl.
CuSOj
0-999
0-999
1-029
1-058
1-089
1-121
1-154
1-187
0-999
0-999
1-050
1-103
1-161
-033
1-068
1-105
1-143
1-182
1-223
1-264
1-307
1-352
1-399
1-449
1-503
1-558
1-616
1-676
1-734
1-786
1-820
1-840
1-839
1 -220
1-253
1-287
1 -320
1-350
1-377
1-402
1-424
1-443
1-461
1-479
1-497
1-514
1-530
1 -024
ZnSO^.
PbA
0-999
1-052
1-108
1-168
1-236
1-307
1-382
0-999
1-037
1-076
1-119
1-164
1-213
1-266
1-049
1-074
1-100 (1-225 )
1-126
1-152
1-177
1-200
A,,'N03.
57 1-043
1-090
10
1-141
15
1-197
20
25 , 1-257
1-323
30
1-396
35
1-479
40
1-572
45
1-677
50
1-792
55
1-919
60
1 -324
1-388
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
..
Cane
Sugar.
0-999
1
-020J
1-040
1-061
1-083
1-106
1-130
1-154
1-179
1-206
1-233
1-261
1-290
1-320
1-351
1-383
ConAlcohol.
0-999
0-992
0-986
0-980
0-975
0-970
0-965
0-958
0-951
0-943
0-933
0-923
0-916
0-901
0-889
0-876
0-863
0-849
0-833
0-816
0-794
tents.
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
TABLES.
;08
TABLE
4.
Density Q of Water at
Temperature t.
(From determinations of
Despretz, Hagen, Hallstrom,
Jolly,
TABLE
Kopp, Matthiessen,
and
Pierre,
Also Yolumes
F" of
Rosetti.)
a glass vessel at
15,
5.
Expansion of Water
FROM 0 TO 100.
which
air
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
99988
99993
99997
99999
00000
99999
99997
99994
99988
99982
99974
99965
99955
99943
99930
99915
99900
99884
99866
99847
99827
99806
99785
99762
99738
99714
99689
99662
99635
99607
99579
-5
-4
-2
-1
+1
2
3
6
10
12
13
15
15
16
18
19
20
21
21
23
24
24
25
27
27
28
28
00154
00148
00142
00137
00134
00132
00132
00132
00135
00139
00145
00151
00159
00168
00179
00191
00204
00218
00233
00249
00267
00286
00305
00326
00348
00370
00392
00416
00441
00467
00493
Volume of
Grm. of Water
in Cubic Centimetres.
Diflf.
of
+ 3
+ 4
+ 6
+ 6
+ 8
+ 9
+ 11
+ 12
+ 13
+ 14
+ 15
+ 16
+ 18
+ 19
+ 19
+ 21
+ 22
+ 22
+ 22
+ 24
+ 25
+ 26
+ 26
Temp.
Volume.
1-0001
1-0000
10
0003
15
-0009
20
rooi7
25
1-0029
30
1-0043
35
1-0059
40
1-0077
45
1-0097
50
1-0120
55
1-0144
60
1-0170
65
1-0197
-0227
70
75
1-0258
80
1-0290
85
1-0323
90
1-0358
95
1-0395
100
1-0432
Increase per
0-00012
0-00016
0-00024
0-00028
0-00032
0-00036
00040
0-00046
0-00048
0-00052
0-00054
0-00060
0-00062
0-00064
0-00066
0-00070
0-00074
0-00074
1".
309
TABLES.
TABLE
6.
at 4 C.
t.
6=:700iii-
710niin.
720mBi.
730mm.
740mm.
750miii.
Comp.
700mm.
770mm.
0-00
0-00
0-00
0-00
0-00
0-00
0-00
0-00
1191
1186
1182
1178
1173
1169
1165
1161
1157
1153
1208
1203
1199
1195
1190
1186
1182
1177
1173
1169
1225
1220
1216
1212
1207
1203
1198
1194
1190
1186
1242
1237
1233
1228
1224
1219
1215
1211
1206
1202
1259
1254
1249
1245
1241
1236
1232
1227
1223
1219
1276
1271
1267
1262
1257
1253
1248
1244
1239
1235
1293
1288
1283
1279
1274
1270
1265
1260
1256
1251
1310
1305
1300
1296
1291
1286
1282
1277
1272
1268
10
1149
1165
1181
1198
1214
1231
1247
1263
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1145
1141
1137
1133
1129
1125
1121
1117
1113
1161
1157
1153
1149
1145
1141
1137
1133
1129
1177
1173
1169
1165
1161
1157
1153
1149
1145
1194
1189
1185
1181
1177
1173
1169
1165
1161
1210
1206
1202
1197
1193
1189
1185
1181
1177
1226
1222
1218
1214
1209
1205
1201
1197
1193
1243
1238
1234
1230
1225
1221
1217
1213
1209
1259
1255
1250
1246
1242
1237
1233
1229
1224
20
1109
1125
1141
1157
1173
1189
1204
1220
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
1106
1102
1098
1095
1091
1087
1083
1080
1076
1073
1121
1118
1114
1110
1106
1103
1099
1095
1092
1088
1137
1133
1130
1126
1122
1118
1114
1110
1107
1103
1153
1149
1145
1141
1138
1134
1130
1126
1122
1119
1169
1165
1161
1157
1153
1149
1145
1142
1138
1134
1185
1181
1177
1173
1169
1165
1161
1157
1153
1149
1200
1196
1192
1188
1184
1180
1176
1172
1169
1165
1216
1212
1208
1204
1200
1196
1192
1188
1184
1180
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
18.)
Prop.
Parts.
17
mm.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
5
7
8
10
12
14
15
R
ID
-j^mm.
6
8
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
14
F.
10
30
imm.
2
3
4
5
3
4
6
7
9
7
8
9
10
12
13
TABLES.
;io
TABLE
7.
t.
+ af.
t.
+ af.
t.
+ at.
0 C.
t.
= 00 03 6 65.
+ at.
t.
+ a.
1-0000
20
1-0733
40
1-1466
60 1-2199
1-0037
21
1-0770
41
1-1503
61
1-2236
81
1-0073
22
1-0806
42
1-1539
62
1-2272
82
1-0110
23
1-0843
43
1-1576
63
1-2309
83
1-3042
1-0147
24
1-0880
44
1-1613
64
1-2346
84
1-3079
1-0183
25
1-0916
45
1-1649
65
1-2382
85
1-3115
-0220
26
1-0953
46
1-1686
66
1-2419
86
1-3162
1-0257
27
1-0990
47
1-1723
67
1-2456
87
1-3189
1-0293
28
1-1026
48
1-1759
68
1-2492
88
1-3225
1-0330
29
1-1063
49
1-1796
69
1-2529
89
1-3262
10^
1-0366
30
1-1099
50
1-1832
70
1-2565
90
1-3298
11
1-0403
31
1-1136
51
1-1869
71
1-2602
91
1-3335
12
1-0440
32
1-1173
52
1-1906
72
1-2639
92
1-3372
13
1-0476
33
1-1209
53
1-1942
73
1-2675
93
1-3408
14
1-0513
34
1-1246
54
1-1979
74
1-2712
94
1-3445
15
1-0550
35
1-1283
55
1-2016
75
1-2749
95
1-3482
16
1-0586
36
1-1319
56
1-2052
76
1-2785
96
1-3.518
17
1-0623
37
1-1356
57
1-2089
77
1-2822
97
1-3555
18
1-0660
38
1-1393
58
1-2126
78
1-2859
98
1-3592
19
1-0696
39
1-1429
59
1-2162
79
1-2895
99
1-3628
20
1-0733
40
1-1466
60
1-2199
80
80 1-2932
1-2969
-3005
311
TABLES.
TABLE
7a.
TABLE
8.
Ic.
07 +
0-8 +
0-9 +
1-0 +
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
2-0
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
1-57
1-36
1-19
1-06
0-95
0-86
0-78
0-71
0-66
0-61
0-56
0-52
0-49
0-46
k.
A.
2-0 + 0-46
3-0 + 0-26
4-0 + 0-16
5-0 + 0-10
6-0 + 0-0(J
7-0 + 0-(i3
8-0 + 0-01
9-0 - 01)1
10-0 - 0-02
12-0 - 0-04
14-0 - 0-06
16-0 - 0-07
18-0 - 0-08
20-0 - o-o
0-0012
1000
\\
8-4/
Compare
p. 33.
and
its
to vacuo.
weiglit
TABLES.
312
TABLE
9.
The length i
of a
body
increased
is
its
26.)
0-0000285
0-000012
0-0000085
0-000015
Gold
0-0000175
Co]iper
Vulcanite 0-00008
Lead
Brass
Iron
Glass
German
The volume
volume at 0 for
At
of
000019
000017
000009
000019
000029
000022
Silver
Platinum
Silver
Zinc
Tin
0' 0001815
quicksilver increases
of
its
1.
15 a solution of
jj
expands for 1
Strong spirits of wine 0-0003 + 0-000009 j^;
sugar '00016 + 0*000004 ^j; common salt, dilute sulphuric acid
0-00016 + 0-00001 Oj>.
:
TABLE
Boiling Temperature,
Pressure
h.
680
681
682
683
6S4
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
&.
t.
t,
of
10.
Water at Barometer
b (after
6.
t.
Regnault).
6.
h.
t.
t.
96 92
700
97 72
720
98-49
740
99 -26
760
100 -00
9S
01
75
21
53
41
29
61
04
97 00
04
08
12
16
20
24
28
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
710
79
83
87
57
22
61
23
65
24
-69
25
72
26
76
27
80
28
84
29
88
730
92
31
95
32
33 98 ^99
34 99 OS
07
35
11
36
14
37
38
IS
22
39
740 99 ^26
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
750
33
07
^59
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
63
770
36
67
71
40
70
52
74
53
78
54
82
55
-85
56
89
57
93
58
96
59
760 100 -00
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
780
44
32
36
40
44
48
52
56
60
64
68
97 72
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
720
91
95
99
97
98 03
07
11
15
19
22
26
30
34
38
42
46
98 49
51
-37
41
44
48
52
56
11
15
18
22
26
29
33
47
51
55
58
62
65
69
100-72
313
TABLES.
TABLE
lOa.
mm.
90
91
92
93
94'"
mm.
mm.
mm.
ram.
mm.
95
90
97
mm.
mm.
633-8
657-5
mm.
6820
98
99
100
mm.
mm.
mm.
527-4 547-8 568-9 590-6 613-0 636-1 659-9 684-5 709-8 735-8 762-7
529-5 549-9 571-0 592-8 615-3 638-5 662-4 687-0 712-4 738-5 765-5
533-5 554-1 575-3 597-3 619-9 643-2 667-2 692-0 717-6 743-8 771-9
535-5
539-6 560-4 581-8 604-0 626-8 650-3 674-6 699-6 725-4 751-9 779-3
541-7
622-2
645-6 669-7
694-6 720-1
746-5 773-7
697-1
749-2 776-5
7-22-7
314
TABLES.
TABLE
11.
0.
On
/3)
The
ht.
table contains
Observed height
(li)
in
mm.
+o-oos<
6S0.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
690.
roo.
710.
720.
7S0.
740.
750.
760.
770.
mm.
mm.
mm.
mm.
mm.
mm.
mm.
mm.
mm.
mm.
0-11
0-22
0-33
0-44
0-55
0-66
0-77
0-88
0-99
1-10
1-21
1-32
1-43
1-54
1-65
1-76
1-87
1-98
2-09
2-20
2-31
2-42
2-63
2-64
2-75
2-86
2-97
3-08
3-19
3-30
0-11
0-22
0-34
0-45
11
23
12
23
35
46
58
69
81
12
23
35
47
58
70
82
93
05
12
24
35
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
08
20
32
44
56
68
80
92
2 04
2 16
2 28
2 40
2 52
2 64
2 76
2 88
3 00
3 12
3 24
3 36
3 48
3-60
12
24
36
49
12
25
37
49
62
74
86
98
10
23
35
48
60
72
85
97
09
22
34
46
59
12
25
37
50
62
75
87
99
12
25
37
50
62
75
87
2 00
2 12
2 25
2 37
2 49
2 62
2 74
2 87
2 99
3 12
3 24
3 37
3 49
3 62
3-74
34
45
57
68
79
0.-56
0-67
0-78
0-89
1-01
1-12
1-23
1-34
1-45
1-56
1-68
1-79
1-90
2-00
2-12
2-24
2-35
2-46
2-57
2-68
2-79
2-91
3-02
3-13
3-24
3-35
92
04
15
27
38
50
91
02
13
25
36
47
59
70
61
81
93
2
2
2
2
2
2
04
15
27
38
49
2
2
73
84
96
07
19
30
42
53
65
76
88
99
61
2
2
2
2 72
84
95
06
18
29
3-40
2
2
3 11
3 22
3 34
3-45
2
2
3
3
3
17
28
40
52
63
75
87
98
2 10
2 22
2 33
2 45
2 57
2 68
2 80
2 92
3 03
3 15
3 27
3 38
3-50
47
59
71
83
95
06
18
30
42
54
66
77
89
2 01
2 13
2 25
2 37
2 48
2 60
2 72
2 84
2 96
3 07
3 19
3 31
3 43
3-55
61
73
85
97
09
22
34
46
58
70
82
94
2
2
2
2
2
07
19
31
43
55
2 67
2 79
2 92
3 04
3 16
3 28
3 40
3 52
3-65
2
2
2
2
2 71
2 83
2 95
3 08
3 20
3 32
3 45
3 57
3-69
ram.
01
02
02
03
04
05
06
06
07
08
09
10
10
11
12
13
14
14
15
16
17
18
18
19
20
21
22
22
23
0-24
315
TABLES.
TABLE
Mean Height
12.
of Barometer at Elevation
Sea-level.
H.
metres.
Eng.
feet.
328
656
984
1312
1640
1968
2296
2624
2952
3280
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
h.
6.
H.
mm.
inches.
metres.
760
751
742
733
724
716
707
699
690
682
674
29-92
29-57
29-21
28-85
28-50
28-19
27-83
27-52
27-17
26-85
26-53
1000
1100
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
TABLE
H.
Eng.
feet.
3280
3608
3936
4265
4592
4920
5248
5577
5905
6-233
6561
H above the
C
6.
I).
mm.
inches.
674
666
658
650
642
635
627
620
612
605
598
26-53
26-22
25-90
25-59
25-27
25-00
24-68
24-41
24-09
23-82
23-54
12a.
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
inches.
3-93708
7-87415
11-81124
15-74832
19-68539
23-6-2247
27-55955
31-49663
35-43371
39-37079
mm.
mches.
710
27-9532
28-3469
28-7406
29-1343
29-5280
29-9217
30-3155
30-7091
7-20
730
740
750
760
770
780
790
800
31-10'29
31-4966
316
TABLES.
and Regnault
e.
mm.
gr.
2-0
2-2
2-4
2-6
2-8
3-1
3-3
3-6
3-9
4-2
4-6
2-1
2-4
2-7
3-0
3-2
3-5
3-8
4-1
4-4
4-6
4-9
t.
-10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
t.
see 28.)
e.
t.
mm.
0"
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TABLE
4-6
4-9
5-3
5-7
6-1
6-5
7-0
7-5
8-0
8-5
9-1
4-9
5-2
5-6
6-0
6-4
6-8
7-3
7-7
81
8-8
9-4
10"
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Lead
0-0.314
Iron.
Glass
0-114
0-19
0-0324
0-0951
0-094
0-0324
0-0570
0-0955
0-0562
Gold
Copper
Brass
Platinum
Silver
Zinc
Tin
gr.
9-1
9-8
15.
Temperature.
10-4
11-1
11-9
12-7
13-5
14-4
15-4
16'3
17-4
Heats
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
21
22
23
30
0-02
0-04
0-08
0-16
0-35
0-75
17-4
18'5
17-2
18-2
19-3
20-4
21-5
22-9
24-2
25-6
27-0
28-6
30-1
p. 84).
0-516
0-615
0-0333
0-426
0-555
1-0000
1-0005
1-0012
1 -0020
Water at 0
10
20
30
,,
mean between
and 100
gr.
19-7
20-9
22-2
23-6
25-0
26-5
28-1
29-8
31-6
24
25
26
27
28
29
(comp.
/.
mm.
Ether at 17
Alcohol at 17
Quicksilver
Oil of Turpentine at 17
Glycerine
Temperature.
mm.
0
20
9-4
10-0
10-6
11-3
12-0
12-8
13-6
14-5
15-1
16-2
17-2
TABLE
e.
t.
mm.
Specific
14.
c.
1-0050
in
Mm.
Tension.
mm.
160
5-9
1-5
240
260
280
11-0
19-9
34-7
58-8
96-7
155-2
3-1
300
242-2
180
200
220
of
317
TABLES.
TABLE
16.
Capillary Depression of Mercury in a Glass
Tube. Interpolated from observations of Mendelejeff and
Gutkowsky.
Height of the Meniscus in
mm.
Diameter
0-4
0-6
0-8
1-0
1-2
1-4
1-6
1-8
mm.
mm.
mm.
mm.
mm.
mm.
mm.
mm.
mm.
4
5
6
0'S3
0-47
0-27
018
1-22
0-65
0-41
0-28
0-20
0-15
1-54
0-86
0-56
0-40
0-29
0-21
0-15
0-10
0-08
0-04
1-98
1-19
0-78
0-53
0-38
0-28
0-20
0-14
0-10
0-07
2-37
1-45
0-98
0-67
0-46
0-33
0-25
0-18
0-13
0-10
1-80
1-21
0-82
0-56
0-40
0-29
0'21
0-15
0-12
1-43
0-97
0-65
0-46
0-33
0-24
0-18
0-13
8
9
10
11
12
1.3
TABLE
p,
1-13
0-77
0-52
0-.37
0-27
0-19
0-14
17.
Modulus of Elasticity E, Breaking Strain
AND Velocity of Sound in some Metals when
STRETCHED AT
1 7
C. (after
^'^
mm.
sq.
Wertheim).
that
is, if
a wire be employed
"^
length
of a wire of length
a stretching weight of
q sq.
mm.
and section
kgr., will
be
q sq.
mm., caused by
L
P
^, and
a wire of
An
Example.
diameter; or
stretched
its
iron wire
section
by a load of
5 kgr.
Lead
....
Iron
Steel
Gold
Copper
.
Brass
Platinum
Silver
Zinc
Tin
Glass
1000 -
is
0*4"
x 3"14
in length,
0"i )0 sq.
^ ^^^^^
"^-
in
It will
be
It will
be
and 0'8
mm
0-53"^"^-
30-5 kgr.
E.
P-
1800
19000
21000
8100
12400
9000
17000
7400
8700
4000
7000
60
80
27
40
60
30
29
13
2
u.
1300-^
sec.
5000
5100
2100
3700
3200
2800
2700
3500
2300
5000
318
TABLES.
TABLE
C-i-
C-i-
C.
c.
c,.
Cj.
16-35
17-32
18-35
19-44
20-60
21-82
23-12
24-50
25-95
27-50
29-13
30-86
32-70
34-65
36-71
38-89
41-20
43-65
46-25
49-00
51-91
55-00
58-27
61 -73
65-41
69-30
73-42
77-79
82-41
87-31
92-50
98-00
103-8
110-0
116-5
123-5
130-8
138-6
146-8
155-6
164-8
174-6
185-0
196-0
207-6
220-0
233-1
246-9
261-7
277-2
293-7
311-2
329-7
349-2
370-0
392-0
415-3
523-3
554-4
587-4
622-3
659-3
698-5
740-0
784-0
830-6
880-0
932-3
987-7
(7,
H
B^
18.
Pitch and
TABLE
440-0
466-2
493-9
C4.
<-3-
2093
2218
2350
2489
2637
2794
2960
3136
3322
3520
3729
3951
1047
1109
1175
1245
1319
1397
1480
1568
1661
1760
1865
1975
19.
to
Bunsen and
KircliliofFs scale
being
1 division.
The first number denotes the position of the middle of the line
upon the scale, the Eoman figure indicates the brightness, I being the
brightest, and the third number gives the breadtli of the band when
it
exceeds
1 scale-di\'ision,
slit.
The
Na.
Faint con-
33-1 IV. 2
36-7 IV.
45-2 IV. s
41-7 I. 1-5
46-8 III. 2
50-0
I.
I.
tianoiis
spectrum
from 55 to
120
153-0 IV.
to 48, yellow
49-0 III.
29-8
32-1
33-8
36-3
38-6
41-5
45-8
52-8 IV.
54-9 IV.
60-8 I. 1-5
68-0 IV. 2
135-0 IV.
Ba.
Sr.
32-0
red
violet beyond.
Ca.
Li.
17-5 IL s
and
in.
II.
II.
IL
III.
III.
35-2 IV. 2
41-5 III. 3
45-6
in.sr5
I.
52-1 IV.
56-0 III. 2
60-8
II. 5
66-5 III. 3
71-4 in. 3
105-0 III.s 76-8 in. 2
82-7 IV. 4
89 3 in. 2
319
TABLES.
TABLE
19 a.
A
B
Element.
Lio.
Ea
1-1" metre
17-5
6867
27-6
6562
84 -0
Di
D,
5895
5269
5183
75-7
4861
90-0
4307
127-5
3968
162-0
3933
166-0
Wave-Length.
7685
7604
1-10 metre
50-0
;;}
5889
Scale
71-0
Number.
17-5
6705
32-0
6562
34-0
Lip
6102
45-2
Na
5892
50-0
5662
58-
Edge
of
(probably a hydrocarbon
Tl
5348
67-
5170
75-
HP
4861
90-
Sr
4607
105-
Ga
4226
135-
Hy
4101
151-
Kp
4080
153-
line).
line).
Flame spectrum.
TABLES.
320
TABLE
196.
Shown by a
h.
mm
Transmitted.
mm
ORDER.
106
133
137
140
153
166
215
252
268
275
3 ORDER.
Iron gray-
White
White
564
violet
Straw yellow
Pure yellow
Lively green
Brown yellow
Red orange
Warm red
Deep red
Dark
Bright blue
violet
Indigo
Blue
Gray blue
Blue green
294
332
364
374
Purple
Indigo
Impure
low
629
Blue
Flesh colour
(gi-een-
Violet
Skyhlue
low
Golden yellow
Orange
Greenish blue
Brown orange
Green
Bright
Indigo
667
688
Sea green
Intense green
Brown red
713
Greenish yellow
Flesh colour
Carmine red
Dull purple
Violet gray
Gray blue
747
767
810
826
413
Bright green
Purple
421
Yellowish
Violet purple
433
green
Greenish yel-
Violet
550
4 ORDER.
841
Gray blue
855
872
905
Bluish green
963
Clear gray
gi-ay
Pine clear
Grayish red
Carmine red
green
Grayish red
green
1003
Gray, almost
white
Flesh colour
5
Dark blue
Greenish blue
Dark
Green
violet
Greenish yellow
Grayish blue
Green
ORDER.
Indigo
Bright
red
orange
red
Sea green
Fine green
Dull sea green
Yellowish
gi-ay
1024
455
474
499
Violet
car-
mine red
low
Pure yellow
Orange
yel-
ish)
Pale green
Yellow green
Bright green
Greenish yel-
Yellowish
green
575
2 ORDER.
282
287
Transmitted.
lOS"
lilack
20
48
79
109
117
129
Reflected.
h.
mm.
1169
Dull blue
green
1334
Dull
Dull
flesh
colour
flesh
colour
Dull blue
green
"
321
TABLES.
TABLE
20.
Comp. 39.)
At 17 "5 the Index
in temperature
for Bisulphide
of Carbon, 0-0008.
For Biaxial Crystals the numbers given are when not otherwise mentioned for the mean ray.
B.
C.
D.
1-54
1-68
1-50
1-57
1-54
1-36
1-52
1-44
Canada Balsam
Ether
Felsjiar
(har(
rd)
Fluor Spar
The
three principal
0.
1-52
1-64
1-31
1-50
1-97
1 47
1-56
1-48
1-65
Ice
Nitre
Phosphorus in CSg
Rape Oil
....
Sugar
Turpentine
Tourmaline
"
Sodium
Yellow are
Selenite
Topaz
1-529
1 -522
-600
1-594
1-686
1-621
1 -682
1-614
s.
l-3374'l-3407 1-3436
l-3696jl-3733 1-3761
1-6539J1-6781 1-7004
1-6340-1-6652 1-7009
1-534 1-540 1-545
1-6-21 1-627 1-631
1-620 1-631 1-640
1-772 11-792 1-811
1-668 1-676 1-683
1-491 il-495 1-498
1-550 1-554 1 -558
1-559 1-564 1-568
1-691 1-698 1-705
1-619 1-624 1-627
1-554 1-562 1-569
Gypsum (Selenite)
Heavy Spar
1-00029
Air
Apophyllite
Augite (Diopside)
Benzol
Beryl
E.
1-520
1-561
1-530
1-612
TABLES.
122
TABLE
21.
64
a,
small oscillation.
k.
a.
k.
10
0-00000
000
002
004
008
012
017
023
030
039
0-00048
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
0-00048
058
069
080
093
107
122
138
154
172
0-00190
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
TABLE
0-00428
457
487
518
550
583
616
651
686
723
0-00761
0-00190
210
230
251
274
297
322
347
373
400
0-00428
21
21a.
When
By
subtracting the
number
in the
is
r Scale-divisions (49).
m = 50.
deflection.
100.
150.
200.
250.
300.
350.
400.
450.
500.
1-11
0-77
0-57
0-44
0-35
2-60
1-82
1-34
1-03
0-82
5-02
3-53
2-61
2-00
1-59
8-54
6-03
4-47
3-44
2-73
13-33
9-45
7-03
5-43
4-30
19-48
13-90
10-38
8-03
6-40
27-14
19-47
14-60
11-33
9-04
36-35
26-25
19-73
15-38
12-30
5-21
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
0-04
0-03
0-02
0-02
01
0-33
0-23
0-17
0-13
0-10
2000
2200
2400
0-01
0-01
0-01
0-01
0-01
0-08
0-07
0-06
0-05
0-04
0-28
0-23
0-19
0-16
0-14
0-66
0-55
0-46
0-39
0-34
1-29
1-07
0-90
0-77
0-66
2-22
1-83
1-54
1-32
1-14
3-51
2-91
2-45
2-09
1-81
4-32
3-64
3-11
2-69
7-37
6-12
5-16
4-42
3-82
10-05
8-35
7-05
6-03
5-21
0-00
0-00
0-00
0-00
0-00
0-04
0-03
0-03
0-03
0-02
0-02
0-12
0-11
0-10
0-09
0-08
0-07
0-29
0-26
0-23
0-58
0-51
0-45
0-40
0-36
0-32
0-99
0-87
0-77
0-69
0-62
0-56
1-58
1-38
1-23
1-10
0-98
0-89
2-35
2-07
1-83
1-64
1-47
1-33
3-33
2-93
2-60
2-32
2-09
1-88
4-55
4-01
3-56
3-18
2-86
2-58
2600
2800
3000
3200
3400
3600
3800
4000
00
0-21
0-18
0-17
123
TABLES.
TABLE
22.
Latitude.
20
45
2-08
2-04
2-00
1-96
1-92
1-87
1-84
1-80
1-76
1-73
1-68
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
30
25
2-11
2-07
2-03
1-99
1-95
1-91
1-87
1-83
1-80
1-76
1-74
40
2-20
2-16
2-11
2-07
2-03
1-99
1-95
2-24
2-20
2-16
2-12
2-07
2-03
1-99
1-94
1-90
1-86
1-82
2-16
2-12
2-08
2-03
1-99
1-95
1-91
1-87
1-84
1-81
1-77
35
TABLE
1-91
1-87
1-83
1-80
23.
North
Lat.
45
50
55
45
50
55
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
15-9
17-1
18-5
15-5
16-6
17-7
15-1
16-1
16-9
14-6
15-5
16-3
14-2
15-0
15-7
13-7
14-4
15-1
13-2
13-8
14-4
12-8
13-2
13-8
12-3
12-8
13-3
11-9
12-4
12-8
11-4
11-8
12-2
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
ll-4
ll-8
12-2
10-9
11-3
11-6
10-4
10-7
11-1
9-9
10-2
10-6
9-4
9-7
10-0
9-0
9-2
9-5
8-7
8-6
8-9
8-2
8-1
8-3
7-8
7-6
7-8
7-4
7-1
7-2
6-8
6-5
6-5
324
TABLES.
TABLE
24.
Inclination,
The
North
Longitude.
Latitude.
25
30
35
45
62-3
61-4
46
47
48
49
63-1
63-7
621
60-5
61-3
62-1
62-9
63-7
64-4
65-2
66-0
66-6
67-3
68-1
20
50
51
52
53
54
55
64-4
65-1
65-8
66-4
67-1
67-7
68-4
64-5
65-2
65-8
66-5
67-1
67-7
68-4
62-9
63-7
64-4
65-2
65-9
66-5
67-1
67-8
68-5
40
61-5
62-2
63-1
63-8
64-6
65-3
66-1
66-9
677
TABLES.
TABLE
25.
Mercury at
0 C.
German
,,
0-04
0-08
,,
I'O
Silver
,,
Mercury
Sulplmric Acid
mean
per cent.
,,
,,
,,
Calling the value given in the Table for any substance s, the rew of a column of / metres length, and q sq. mm. section,
sistance
be
to
at
^o
10x0-0162
^
=
mm.
, .
=0-324
0-350 Siem.
feiem.,
For
section
,
and
at
These numbers
Brass (hard)
Copper (hard)
(soft)
Gas Carbon
0-360
0-133
0-051
0-0166
0-0162
40-120
Silver (soft)
(hard)
,,
0-212
0-0209
Tin
Zinc
Antimony
Bismuth
(pressed)
,,
German
Silver (hard)
Gold
Iron
(soft)
Lead (pressed)
Mercury
Platinum (soft)
.
0986
-199
0000
-0918
0153
-0166
134
0571
TABLES.
326
TABLE
26.
Ann.
By
vi.
37.
the percentage
is
7.-.
10
15
20
25
Per
Cent.
107
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
50
60
70
80
Mi
63
113
153
183
2-2
200
2-3
2-1
2-1
2 '2
241
431
573
665
720
734
719
686
590
480
370
250
Afc
86
166
242
315
376
2-0
1-9
1-7
1-6
1-5
fc.l07
Ak
38
64
83
2-4
2-5
2-6
Ak
J-.107
A/c
;c-.io7
1-50
1-45
1-40
1-38
1-38
1-39
1-43
1-49
369
590
698
713
677
620
553
483
1-59
1-57
1-56
1-55
1-54
1-53
1-52
195
366
508
611
671
691
678
636
505
349
202
103
HCl
H2SO4
KHO
MgSOi
ZnSO.
^".
107
24
39
45
45
39
CUSO4.
Ak
Alum.
Afc
A. 107
Ak
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-7
18
2"2
2-2
2-3
30
39
fc.l07
A/v
32
64
98
136
175
215
257
296
367
416
2-1
2-0
1-9
1-8
1-8
1-7
1-6
1-5
1-4
1-4
Z11SO4.
107
24
AM 07 Ak
18 2-3
30 2-3
39 2-3
43 2-4
44 2-6
41
34
3-0
4-0
Ag NO3.
A:.107
24
44
64
81
99
116
131
146
173
196
3-49
Conductivity.
510-0 at 28
45-1 at 17
44-2 at 23-5
A:.
Afc
2-0
2-9
KL
1-21
1-28
1-36
1-45
1-54
1-62
1-70
1-78
1-93
2-13
2-56
Maximum
HNO3
A;.
H2SO4.
HCl.
1-6
1-6
1-5
1-3
MgSO^.
Naj SO4.
71-.107
HNO3.
fc.l07
NH4CI.
NaCl.
Cent.
Sp. gr.
-185
-092
-224
-274
-183
-286
KHO.
Ak
A. 107
Ak
2-2
2-2
2-2
161
295
1-9
1-9
1-9
2-0
2-1
2-3
2-4
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
399
468
506
508
477
422 2-7
327
TABLES.
TABLE
26a.
Eesistances of Metals
column
Maxwell).
(J. C.
is
gramme
the resistance in centimetres per second of a cube of one centimetre, according to the experiments of Matthiessen."
Specific Gravity.
R.
Percentage
Increment of
Resistance for
r.
1 C. at 20 C.
19-27
0-4150
,,
11-391 pressed
2-257
13-595 liquid
13-071
15-218 hard or annealed 1-668
Silver
Co])per
Gold
Lead
Mercniry
Gold 2, Silver 1
Selenium at 100 C. crystalline form
1609
1642
2154
19847
96146
10988
0-377
0-388
0-365
0-387
0-072
0-065
1-00
6x1013
TABLE
26b.
(J. C.
Maxwell).
Concentrated
Volt.
Solution of
Daniell
I.
II.
III.
H2SO4+ 4Aq
Amalgamated Zinc
+ 12 Aq
+
Bunsen I.
IL
Grove
+
+
Volt.
CUSO4 Copper
CUSO4
CUNO3
HNO3
,,
Carbon
Aq
1-079
0-978
1-00
1-964
1-888
1-956
,,
HNO,
riatinum
Cm.
(See pp. 228, 286.)
Sec.2
TABLE
27.
Curi'ent-Strength which
is
measured in
Cubic
Cm. Water
Gases
per Minute.
Mm.^ Mgr.*
Sec.
Mgr.
Water
it
Mgr.
Copper
following
to
Numbers
Mgr.
Silver
Magnetic
Measure
Mm.^ Mgr.*
Sec.
0-5363
1 -865
1-889
3-522
0-5294
0-1555
0-2839
0-0834
0-2937
1-054
0-5653
1-991
6-432
11-99
3-405
0-9484
1-769
-.50-23
0-1475
6-779
328
TABLES.
TABLE
PIIACTIGAL USE IN
what
therefore
Dimensions.
......
........
......
P
P
Force
m
m
m
1%
mh
electricity, meclianical
mgm. mm.
sec.
-100,000.
10,000.
measure
mi
magnet pole
-1,000.
t--
II
....
I'h
ml
100.
i-^
mi
-10.
I
I
10-1.
TABLE
28a.
....
....
Engineering.
Electromotive Force
the
Approximately equal
Resistance
the Ohm
Value in
C. G. S. Unit.
Volt.
the
A vipire
the Coulomb
Quantity
10**
10*
10~^
Ohm.
= 10~
10^
329
TABLES.
BWG.
in
inches.
BWG.
Diameter in
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
0-083
065
049
0-340
284
238
203
165
134
109
4
6
8
10
12
TABLE
Mean
28 c.
Water
From
,,
200
230
TABLE 28d
Phosphorus
Zinc
Iron
Tin
1-233
Copper
Carbonic Oxide (CO)
Marsh'bas (CH4)
Gas (C2H4)
Alcohol (C2H5HO)
From
Potassium
Zinc
Iron
Tin.
Antimony
Arsenic
Copper
0 to
009
008
007
005
004
012
(Pouillet).
100 C.
,,
300
500
700
1000
,,
1-200
,,
,,
,,
0-0335
0-0343
0-0352
0-0360
0-0373
0-0382
in
Oxygen
Compound
(Stewart),
Observer.
formed.
602
2431
2403
13063
13108
11942
11858
6850
7183
OH2
23783
2655
15-29
1745
1079
707
994
961
SO,
Psbs
ZnO
^6304
Snbg
CuO
CO,
Favre and Silbermann.
C02 + 2H20Andrews,
2CO,"+2H.p
2C0j+3H.,0
Heat OF Combustion
Hydrogen
32
33
84
35
36
Gramme.
34462
33808
8080
7900
2220
2307
5747
1301
1576
Carbon
OlefiaAt
0-014
of
Water raised
1 C. by
Combination
of
Hydrogen
Sulphur
Platinum
1-0013
1-0035
1-0067
1-0109
1-0160
1-0204
Grammes
28
30
Heat of Combustion
Substance burned.
inches.
035
028
022
018
Specific
40 C.
80
120
160
,,
Diameter in
inches.
(Regnaiilt).
0 to
(Holtzapffel).
in Chlorine.
and Sillicrmann.
HCl
Favi'e
KCl
ZnCl
FeXlg
Andrews.
SnCl4
SbClj
ASCI3
CuCla
330
TABLES.
TABLE
29.
is
The
Eoman
all
elements.
which in
The
type.
Name.
Aluminium
Antimony
zincode, are
Al
Sb
Atomic
Weight.
27-5
Valence.
VL
in.
V.
V.
Bi
11
IV.
Bromine
Br
80
I.
Calcium
Ca
40
u.
Carbon
12
IV.
CI
Cr
VL
VL
Barium
Bismuth
Boron
.
Co
Cu
Au
196-7
Chromium
Cobalt
Copper
Gold
As
Ba
35-5
52-5
58-8
63-5
Chlorine
Hydrogen
Iodine
Iron
Fe
127
56
207
24
55
200
I.
IL
IIL
I.
I.
Vl. IIL
IV.
Lead
Pb
Mg
Mn
Hg
Nickel
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Phosphorus
Ni
58-8
N
P
14
16
31
Platinum
Potassium
Pt
197-4
39
I.
28-5
IV.
Silicon
Silver
.
,
Sodium
Strontium
Sulphur
Tin
Zinc
Si
Ag
Na
Sr
Sn
Zn
108
23
87-5
82
118
65
Heat of
Equal Parts.
Specific
0-2143
0-0508
0-0814
n.
V.
Magnesium
Manganese
Mercury
.
appear
the electro-
122
75
137
208
Arsenic
difference, however, is
Symbol.
electrolysis
printed in italics
IL
IIL
VL
II.
VL
IIL
V.
IL
V.
IV.
I.
I.
0-0308
/ 0-1060 Liquid.
\ 0-0843 Solid.
/ 0-24 15 Charcoal.
\ 0-1468 Diamond.
0-1210 Const, press.
0-1070
0-0951
0-0324
3-4090 Const, press.
0-0541
0-1188
0-0314
0-2499
0-114
0-0319 Solid.
0-1091
0-2438 Const, press.
0-2175
0-0324
0-1696
0-0570
0-2984
II.
VL
IV.
IL
0-1776
0-0562
0-0955
331
TABLES.
TABLE
30.
North
Above
Latitude.
Sea-Level.
Aix-la-Chapelle
23-7
50-8
Amsterdam
22-4
52-4
Metres.
160-200
Basle
25-3
47-6
Berlin
52-5
31-1
40
Berne
25-1
47-0
550
Bonn
24-8
50-7
50
Brunswick
28-2
52-3
100
Bremen
26-4
53-1
Brussels
22-0
50-9
90
Darmstadt
26-3
49-9
140
Dorpat
44-3
58-4
260
31-4
51-1
100
26-3
50-1
90
13-4
51-5
Hamburg
27-6
53-5
Cologne
24-6
50-9
Copenhagen
30-3
55-5
17-6
51'5
50
26-9
45-5
130
Dresden
Frankfort-on-
Greenwich
London
Milan
klaint
40
Munich
29-3
48-1
530
Paris
20-0
48-8
60
36-7
47-5
70
St. Petersburg
48-0
59-9
Prague
32-1
50-1
Rome
30-2
41-9
Stockholm
35-8
59-3
Strasbourg
25-4
48-6
150
Stuttgart
26-8
48-8
270
Vienna
34-0
48-2
140
Zurich
26-2
47-4
420-500
Pesth
200
332
TABLES.
TABLE
31.
DifferDeclinaEquation
tion of the ence for
of Time.
1 day.
Sun.
Day.
m.
Jan.
(1)
(6)
10(11)
23-10
22-64
21-99
15 (16)
20 (21)
25 (26)
30 (31)
Feb.
21-16
20-16
19-01
17-71
4)
16-27
9(10)
14(15)
-14-73
-13-08
-11-34
9-52
(3
19 (20)
24 (25)
March
1
11
16
21
26
31
April
5
10
15
20
25
30
7-65
5-73
3-78
1-81
0-16
2-13
4-08
+ 6-00
+ 7-87
+ 9-69
+ 11-45
+ 13-12
+ 14-71
May
5
10
15
20
25
30
+ 16-19
+ 17-57
+ 18-82
+ 19-94
+ 20-92
+ 21-74
June
4
9
14
19
24
29
+ 22-42
+ 22-92
+ 23 -26
+ 23-44
+ 23-43
+ 23-26
0-092
0-130
0-166
0-200
0-230
0-260
0-288
0-308
0-330
0-348
0-364
0-374
0-384
0-390
0-394
0-394
0-394
0-390
0-384
0-374
0-364
0-352
0-334
0-318
0-296
0-276
0-250
0-224
0-196
0-164
0-136
0-100
0-068
0-036
0-002
0-034
S.
+ 3
+ 5
+ 7
+ 9
+ 11
+ 12
+ 13
25
34
42
36
+ 14
+ 14
+ 14
+ 14
+ 13
10
27
25
+ 12
+ 11
+ 10
+ 8
+ 7
+ 5
+ 4
36
31
15
52
23
52
19
13
33
32
Sidereal
at
Time
DeclinaDifferEquation
tion of the ence for
of Time.
Sun.
1 day,
Day.
Noon.
h.
m.
38
58
18
37
57
17
20 36
18
18
19
19
19
20
July
s.
42
24
4
9
14
19
24
29
50
33
16
58
+ 22-92
+ 22-41
+ 21-73
+ 20-91
+ 19-94
-f
20 56 41
21 16 24
21 36 7
21 55 49
2215 32
22
22
23
23
23
+ 17-59
+ 16-23
+ 14-76
+ 13-19
+ 11-54
+ 9-81
58
41
23
6
49
32
+
+
+
2 49
-24
53 14
112 57
1 32 40
152 23
2 12 5
2 52
1 23
04
5
-3 27
- 3 48
-3 53
-3 45
-3 23
-2 49
-24
-
+
+
+
11
10
55
20
32
13
18'
23
28
Sept.
2
3515
54
14
34
54
13
33
3148
5131
311 14
3 30 57
3 50 39
4 10 22
4 30 5
12
17
22
27
1-55
Oct.
2
7
12
17
22
27
Nov.
3-49
5-42
7-32
9-19
10-99
12-73.
14-38
15-94
17-38
18-71
19-89
20-92
11
16
21
26.
Dec.
6
11
6 28 22
16
21
26
31
9 30
5 29 13
5 48 56
6 8 39
8-01
6-16
4-27
2-35
0-40
7^
21-79
22-49
23-00
23-32
23-45
4 49 48
18-83
Aug.
3
28
Leap Year.
-23-39
23-12
m.
068
102
136
164
194
222
5 29
5 58
6 13
6 13
248
272
294
314
330
346
5 57
5 27
4 42
3 44
2 33
1 11
360
370
378
384
390
390
388
386
380
374
360
348
s.
4
4 49
20
1 59
3 41
5 26
7 12
8 55
10 34
12 4
24
14 31
15 23
16
13
330
312
288
266
236
206
16
16
174
140
102
064
026
012
054
10
18
16
15 52
15
14
7
2
-12 36
53
8 54
6 40
4 17
-
49
41
333
TABLES.
TABLE
32.
p.
Correction.
267.)
Year.
Correction
t
1880
1881
1882
1883
1884
1885
+0-82
+0-58
+0-34
+0-09
+0-85
+0-61
TABLE
1886
1887
1888
1889
1890
1891
+0-37
+012
+0-88
+0-64
+0-40
+0-16
33.
Sun's Radius.
Radius.
Date.
January 1
February 1
March
April 1
]\Liy 1
June
0-272
0-271
0-269
0-267
0-265
0-263
TABLE
Date.
July
August 1
September
October
November 1
December 1
0-263
0-263
0-265
0-267
0-269
0-271
34
10
15
20
30
40
Refraction.
Refraction.
Altitude.
0-16
0-09
0-06
0-04
0-028
0-019
50
60
70
0-0(16
80
90
0-003
0-000
0-013
0-009
334
TABLES.
TABLE
Mean Places
35.
Right Ascension.
hr.
a Cassiopeise
a Arietis
a Tauri (Aldebaran)
YearlyVariation.
Yearly
Declination.
Variation
min.
sec.
33
50-0
+ 3-37
55
53
24
+ 19-8
31-4
+ 3-37
22
54
14
+ 17-2
29
10-0
+ 3-44
16
16
17
7-6
4-43
45
52
35
4-1
sec.
a Aurigaj (Capella)
58-5
a Orionis
48
47-1
+ 3-25
23
1-0
39
56-9
+ 2-66
-16
33
21
4-7
27
3-9
+ 3-84
32
45
7-5
33
7-5
+ 3-15
31
36
8-9
a Leonis (Regulus)
10
5-2
+ 3-20
12
32
47
-17-4
a Ursse Majoris
10
56
26-1
+ 3-75
62
23
15
-19-4
+ 3-15
a Canis Majoris
(Siriiis)
a Geminorum (Castor)
13
18
58-7
-10
32
44
-18-9
a Bootis (Arcturus)
14
10
16-7
2-73
19
47
22
-18-9
a Coronse (Gemma)
15
29
41-5
+ 2-54
27
47
-12-3
a Scorpii (Antares)
16
22
10-4
+ 3-67
-26
10
- 8-3
18
32
56-6
+ 2-03
38
40
29
3-2
19
45
1-6
+ 2-93
33
28
9-3
20
37
24-5
+ 2 -04
44
51
34
+ 12-7
+ 3-33
o Virginis (Spica)
(Vega)
Lyrffi
a AquiliE (Altair)
a Cygni
....
Minoris
-30
14
50
+ 19-0
2-98
14
34
16
+ 19-3
21-78
88
40
47
+ 19-0
-19-44
8S
36
34
51
7-7
22
58
53-0
15
28-9
18
10
23-4
22
1-0
oob
TABLES.
TABLE
36.
= 3-1416
(V),
7r2
= 9-870,
= 0-3183, ^=-7854,
4
log.
7r
= 0-4971499.
TT
57 '2958
206265".
=
=
=
6377400 metres.
6356100
,,
6366800
,,
993-5 mm.
At 45 latitude 9806 mm.
990-9 ,,
At the equator 9780 ,,
996-2 ,,
At the poles
9832 ,,
Mean length of civil year 365 days 5 hours 48 minutes 48 seconds.
1 sidereal day=l mean day -3 minutes 55-9 seconds.
Velocity of sound at 0 G. in dry air
The
Mtr.
330
^
1 gi-m.
= 424 gramme metres = 4157 Mtr.^Grm.
1 C.
,,
coefficient of
Electromotive Force
Bunsen = 20-0 Siemens. Weber
Daniell = 11-6
,,
Volt
i=
=
I
=
=
1-92 Volts.
1-11
0-90DanieU.
100000 absolute electro-magnetic units, or
Cm
^ M<nn ^
^ '.
'-
bec.^
galvanic current of 1
^-^
B.A
unit.
Earth quadrant
Metre
= __
10^ "5
3".
FT-^^
J
Second
Second
Wave-length of sodium light (D. Fraunhofer)
,
^,
=
Ohm
plate of quartz 1
light 21 -67.
mm.
0-0005892
mm.
TABLES.
;36
TABLE
37.
Vn.
?l2.
n.
50
1
16
25
36
49
64
6
7
8
9
81
10
100
121
144
169
196
225
256
289
324
361
400
441
484
529
576
625
676
729
784
841
900
961
1024
1089
1156
1225
1296
1369
1444
1521
1600
1681
1764
1849
1936
2025
2116
2209
2304
2401
2500
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1-000
1-414
1-732
2-000
2-236
2-449
2-646
2-828
3-000
3-162
3-317
3-464
3-606
3-742
3-873
4-000
4-123
4-243
4-359
4-472
4-583
4-690
4-796
4-899
5-000
6-099
5-196
5-292
5-385
5-477
5-568
5-657
5-745
5-831
5-916
6-000
6-083
6-164
6-245
6-325
6-403
6-481
6-557
6-633
6-708
6-782
6-856
6-928
7-000
7-071
1-0000
0-5000
0-3333
0-2500
0-2000
0-1667
0-1429
0-1250
0-1111
0-1000
0-0909
0-0833
0-0769
0-0714
0-0667
0-0625
0-0588
0-0556
0-0526
0-0500
0-0476
0-0455
0-0435
0-0417
0-0400
0-0385
0-0370
0-0357
0-0345
0-0333
0-0323
0-0313
0-0303
0-0294
0-0286
0-0278
0-0270
0-0263
0-0256
0-0250
0-0244
0-0238
0-0233
0-0227
0-0222
0-0217
0-0213
0-0208
0-0204
0-0200
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
to2.
2500
2601
2704
2809
2916
3025
3136
3249
3364
3481
3600
3721
3844
3969
4096
4225
4356
4489
4624
4761
4900
5041
5184
5329
5476
5625
5776
5929
6084
6241
6400
6561
6724
6889
7056
7225
7396
7569
7744
7921
8100
8281
8464
8649
8836
9025
9216
9409
9604
9801
10000
Vm.
7-071
7-141
7-211
7-280
7-348
7-416
7-483
7-550
7-616
7-681
7-746
7-810
7-874
7-937
8-000
8-062
8-124
8-185
8-246
8-307
8-367
8-426
8-485
8-544
8-602
8-660
8-718
8-775
8-832
8-888
8-944
9-000
9-055
9-110
9-165
9-220
9-274
9-327
9-381
9-434
9-487
9-539
9-592
9-644
9-695
9-747
9-798
9-849
9-899
9-950
10-000
1_
n
0-0200
0-0196
0-0192
0-0189
0-0185
0-0182
0-0179
0-0175
0-0172
0-0169
0-0167
0-0164
0-0161
0-0159
0-0156
0-0154
0-0152
0-0149
0-0147
0-0145
0-0143
0-0141
0-0139
0-0137
0-0135
0-0133
0-0132
0-0130
0-0128
0-0127
0-0125
0-0123
0-0122
0-0120
0-0119
0-0118
0-0116
0-0115
0-0114
0-0112
0-0111
0-0110
0-0109
0-0108
0-0106
0-0105
0-0104
0-0103
0-0102
0-0101
0-0100
337
TABLES.
TABLE
Angle.
Sine
0-191
0-208
0-225
0-242
0-259
0-276
0-292
0-309
.0-826
20
0-342
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
0-358
0-375
0-391
0-407
0-423
0-438
0-454
0-469
0-485
30
0-500
21
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
0-515
0-530
0-545
0-559
0-574
0-588
0-602
0-616
0-629
40
0-643
31
000
017
035
052
070
087
105
123
141
158
0-174
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
11
Trigonometrical Functions.
17
18
17
18
17
18
18
18
17
18
17
17
17
16
17
17
16
194
213
231
249
268
287
306
325
344
18
19
18
18
19
19
19
19
19
20
20
384
404
424
445
466
488
510
532
554
20
20
21
21
22
22
22
22
23
601
625
649
675
700
727
754
781
810
42
43
44
45
0-656
0-669
0-682
0-695
0-707
24
24
24
26
25
27
27
27
29
29
2-605
2-475
2-356
2-246
2-145
2-050
1-963
1-881
1-804
142
130
119
110
101
95
87
82
77
72
1-664
1-600
1-540
1-483
1-428
1-376
1-327
1-280
1-235
64
60
57
55
52
49
47
45
43
1-192
839
869
900
933
966
000
5-145
4-705
4-331
4-011
3-732
3-487
3-271
3-078
2-904
31
33
33
34
Cotangent.
1-150
1-111
1-072
1
-036
90
000
000
999
999
998
996
995
993
990
988
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
985
526
440
374
320
279
245
216
193
174
157
1-732
577
15
15
15
14
15
14
14
14
13
14
811
643
2-747
364
16
17
16
16
16
15
16
15
16
15
oo
57-29
28-64
19-08
14-30
11-43
9-514
8-144
7-115
6-314
5-671
176
17
17
17
30
41
Cosine.
Tangent.
0-000
0-017
0-035
0-052
0-070
0-0S7
0-105
0-122
0-139
0-156
10
38.
982
978
974
970
966
961
956
951
946
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
940
70
934
927
921
914
906
899
891
883
875
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
866
60
857
848
839
829
819
809
799
788
777
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
766
42
39
39'
36
36
1-000
Tangent.
11
755
743
731
719
707
12
12
12
12
49
48
47
46
45
338
TABLES.
TABLE
39.
Logarithms to 4 Places,
N.
0253
0645
1004
1335
1644
1931
2201
2455
2695
2923
0294
0682
1038
1367
1673
1959
2227
2480
2718
2945
0000
11. 0414
12 0792
13
1139
14 1461
15
1761
16
2041
17 2304
18
2553
19
2788
10
0043
0453
0828
1173
1492
1790
2068
2330
2577
2810
0086
0492
0864
1206
1523
1818
2095
2355
2601
2833
0128
0531
0899
1239
1553
1847
2122
2380
2625
2856
0170
0569
0934
1271
1584
1875
2148
2405
2648
2878
0212
0607
0969
1303
1614
1903
2175
2430
2672
2900
0334
0719
1072
1399
1703
1987
2253
2504
2742
2967
;Diff.
0374
0755
1106
1430
1732
2014
2279
2529
2765
2989
42
38
35
32
30
28
26
25
23
22
'
20
3010
3032
3054
3075
3096
3118
3139
3160
3181
3201
21
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3222
3424
3617
3802
3979
4150
4314
4472
4624
3243
3444
3636
3820
3997
4166
4330
4487
4639
3263
3464
3655
3838
4014
4183
4346
4502
4654
3284
3483
3674
3856
4031
4200
4362
4518
4669
3304
3502
3692
3874
4048
4216
4378
4533
4683
3324
3522
3711
3892
4065
4232
4393
4548
4698
3345
3541
3729
3909
4082
4249
4409
4564
4713
3365
3560
3747
3927
4099
4265
4425
4579
4728
3385
3579
3766
3945
4116
4281
4440
4594
4742
3404
3598
3784
3962
4133
4298
4456
4609
4757
20
19
18
18
17
16
16
15
15
30
4771
4786
4800
4814
4829
4843
4857
4871
4886
4900
14
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4914
5051
5185
5315
5441
5563
5682
5798
5911
4928
5065
5198
5328
5453
5575
5694
5809
5922
4942
5079
5211
5340
5465
5587
5705
5821
5933
4955
5092
5224
5353
5478
5599
5717
5832
5944
4969
5105
5237
5366
5490
5611
5729
5843
5955
4983
5119
5250
5378
5502
5623
5740
5855
5966
4997
5132
5263
5391
5514
5635
5752
5866
5977
5011
5145
5276
5403
5527
5647
5763
5877
5988
5024
5159
5289
5416
5539
5658
5775
5888
5999
5038
5172
5502
5428
5551
5670
5786
5899
6010
14
13
13
13
12
12
12
40
6021
6031
6042
6053
6064
6075
6085
6096
6107
6117
11
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
6128
6232
6335
6435
6532
6628
6721
6812
6902
6138
6243
6345
6444
6542
6637
6730
6821
6911
6149
6253
6355
6454
6551
6646
6739
6830
6920
6160
6263
6365
6464
6561
6656
6749
6839
6928
6170
6274
6375
6474
6571
6665
6758
6848
6937
6180
6284
6385
6484
6580
6675
6767
6857
6946
6191
6294
6395
6493
6590
6684
6776
6866
6955
6201
6304
6405
6503
6599
6693
6785
6875
6964
6212
6314
6415
6513
6609
6702
6794
6884
6972
6222
6325
6425
6522
6618
6712
6803
6893
6981
10
10
10
10
10
50
6990
6998
7007
7016
7024
7033
7042
7050
7059
7067
51
52
53
54
7076
7160
7243
7324
7404
7084
7168
7251
7332
7412
7093
7177
7259
7340
7419
7101
7185
7267
7348
7427
7110
7193
7275
7356
7435
7118
7202
7284
7364
7443
7126
7210
7292
7372
7451
7135
7218
7300
7380
7459
7143
7226
7308
7388
7466
7152
7235
7316
7396
7474
55
N.
11
11
9
9
9
9
8
8
8
8
Diflf.
339
TABLES.
TAELE 3d Continued.
Logarithms to 4 Places.
N.
Diff.
55
56
57
58
59
7404
7482
7559
7634
7709
7412
7490
7566
7642
7716
7419
7497
7574
7649
7723
7427
7505
7582
7657
7731
7435
7513
7589
7664
7738
7443
7520
7597
7672
7745
7451
7528
7604
7679
7752
7459
7536
7612
7686
7760
7466
7543
7619
7694
7767
7474
7551
7627
7701
7774
60
7782
7789
7796
7803
7810
7818
7825
7832
7839
7846
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
7853
7924
7993
8062
8129
8195
8261
8325
8388
7860
7931
8000
8069
8136
8202
8267
8331
8395
7868
7938
8007
8075
8142
8209
8274
8338
8401
7875
7945
8014
8082
8149
8215
8280
8344
8407
7882
7952
8021
8089
8156
8222
8287
8351
8414
7889
7959
8028
8096
8162
8228
8293
8357
8420
7896
7966
8035
8102
8169
8235
8299
8363
8426
7903
7973
8041
8109
8176
8241
8306
8370
8432
7910
7980
8048
8116
8182
8248
8312
8376
8439
7917
7987
8055
8122
8189
8254
8319
8382
8445
70
8451
8457
8463
8470
8476
8482
8488
8494
8500
8506
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
8513
8573
8633
8692
8751
8808
8865
8921
8976
8519
8579
8639
8698
8756
8814
8871
8927
8982
8525
8585
8645
8704
8762
8820
8876
8932
8987
8531
8591
8651
8710
8768
8825
8882
8938
8993
8537
8597
8657
8716
8774
8831
8887
8943
8998
8543
8603
8663
8722
8779
8837
8893
8949
9004
8549
8609
8669
8727
8785
8842
8899
8954
9009
8555
8615
8675
8733
8791
8848
8904
8^60
9015
8561
8621
8681
8739
8797
8854
8910
8965
9020
8567
8627
8686
8745
8802
8859
8915
8971
9025
6
6
6
80
9031
9036
9042
9047
9053
9058
9063
9069
9074
9079
81
9090
9143
9196
9248
9299
9350
9400
9450
9499
9096
9149
9201
9253
9304
9355
9405
9455
9504
9101
9154
9206
9258
9309
9360
9410
9460
9509
9106
9159
9212
9263
9315
9365
9415
9465
9513
9112
9165
9217
9269
9320
9370
9420
9469
9518
9117
9170
9222
9274
9325
9375
9425
9474
9523
9122 9128
9175 9180
9227 9232
9279 9284
9330 9335
9380 9385
9430 9435
9479 ,9484
9528 9533
9133
9186
9238
9289
9340
9390
9440
9489
9538
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
9085
9138
9191
9243
9294
9345
9395
9445
9494
90
9542
9547
9552
9557
9562
9566
9571
9576
9581
9586
91
9590
9638
9685
9731
9777
9823
9868
9912
9956
9595
9643
9689
9736
9782
9827
9872
9917
9961
9600
9647
9694
9741
9786
9832
9877
9921
9965
9605
9652
9699
9745
9791
9836
9881
9926
9969
9609
9657
9703
9750
9795
9841
9886
9930
9974
9614
9661
9708
9754
9800
9845
9890
9934
9978
9619
9666
9713
9759
9805
9850
9894
9939
9983
9624 9628
9671 9675
9717 9722
9763 ^9768
9809 9814
9854 9859
9899 9903
9943 9948
9987 9991
9633
9680
9727
9773
9818
9863
9908
9952
9996
5
5
5
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
N.
7
I
8
8
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
4
4
Diff.
INDEX.
Absolute measure, 269
,,
,,
,,
,,
,,
electrical quantity,
,,
276
force, 273
magnetism of
,,
,,
bar, 277
magnetic intensity, 280
quantity, 277
,,
pole, 277
,,
moment of inertia, 275
rotation, 274
,,
resistance, 287
space and time, 273
work, 274
,,
weighing, 32
,,
,,
,,
,,
,,
,,
,,
,,
Altitude,
measurement
259
of,
,,
Angle of
crystal.
Goniometer, 105
,,
,,
,,
internal resistance
,,
,,
potential, 276^
,,
,,
184
,,
,,
,,
method
of
scale
,,
,,
of,
arms
,,
ratio of the
sensitiveness, 29
,,
testing,
,,
use, 25,
Boiling point, 79
of thermometer, 63
,,
,,
Calibration of wire
Barometer, heidit
of,
of,
Wheatstone's
of thermometer, 65
,,
254
Clock, rate of, 264
Coils of wire, measurement of area, 246
Commutator, 189
Compass, surveying by, 166
Condensers, electrical, 294
Conducting power for heat, 92
Conductivity, electrical, 214
Connectious, galvanic, 185
Corrections, calculation
Crystals, angles of, 105
of,
18
140
,,
biaxial, 143
,,
Currents, measurement of
uniaxial,
in chemical units,
30
193
196
59
for
bridge, 211
24
26
compen220
23
,,
of
Wheatstone's bridge
(Mance), 221
in absolute units,
Balance, adjustment
187
of,
sation (Beetz),
,,
60
Batteries, galvanic,
,,
of recoil, 238
342
INDEX.
Damping
of a needle, 149
Declination, magnetic, 164
astronomical, 256
liquids,
38
by
specific
bottle,
gravity
39
solids, 40
vapours (Dumas), 50
(Gay Lussac), 55
(V. Meyer), 56
,,
Heights, measurement
60
Horizon, artificial, 259
230
,,
absolute
method
(Bosscha), 224
of compensation
(Dubois-Raymond),225
Equal intervals, calculation by, 16
Equilibrium
position
of
swinging
needle, 148
Error, mean, 1, 16
probable, 2
Errors of observation, 1
influence on the
result, 4
coefficient of,
77
determination by measuring,
77
determination by weighings,
of liquids, 79
,,
78
of lens,
moment
of,
156
,,
of,
of, 11
convex, 125
concave, 128
Magnet
Magnetism of
Meridian, determination of
by equal altitudes, 261
Ohm's
Focal length
125
reflection,
,,
total
by galvanometer, 223
method of compensation
Expansion by heat,
by
,,
,,
,,
81
determination,
298
81
Hygrometer, Auguste's. 82
Daniell's and Regnault's,
,,
Ohm's, 228
,,
relative,
absolute
determination,
Poggendorf's, 230
by Clark's potentiometer,
,,
absolute, 80
air,
,,
Hypsometry, 60
95
Electro-dynamometer, 192
Electrometer, portable, 292
quadrant, 251, 293
,,
sine, 248
,,
Electromotive force, 222
of the
,,
by bending a rod, 98
by stretching, 93
from longitudinal vibrations,
by barometer,
absolute, 166
,,
Humidity
inductor, 240
of,
Earth
192
mirror,
laws,
of,
104
182
Kirchhoff, 183
Optic axes, determination of angle, 143
,,
Galvanic
184
connections, 185
batteries,
,,
154
INDEX.
Platinising metals, 185
Potential, electrostatic, 248 *
by quadrant electrometer,
,,
250, 290
by sine electrometer, 248
,,
Pressure, atmospheric, 59
Quantity of
Leyden
electricity in
jar,
251
Quarter-undulation plate, 141
Quartz, rotation of, 141
343
Specific heat,
of
curvature,
spherometer, 122
by
',,
,)
with
reflection,
124
Rate of clock, 264
Reduction factor of galvanometer, 200
of scale readings to angle, 146
,,
Refractive index, sijectrometer, 107
),
by
,,
total
reflection,
absolute measure-
,,
,,
ment, 244
temperature
by,
299
measurement of
by damping, 212
differential
,,
differential
galvano-
12.
Barometer, reduction to
and height
,,
10.
Breaking
of,
329
Current
327
23.
31.
3.
,,
4.
, ,
great,
of,
301
Shunts on galvanometers, 190
Silvering glass, receipt for,. 145
Sound, velocity of, by dust figures, 102
Specific heat, 84
method by cooling, 88
,,
,,
ice,
and percentage,
of water, 308
306
30.
Geographical position,
4.
cities,
22.
2.
39.
Saccharimetry, 133
Short intervals of time, measurement
comjjarison,
19.
9.
24.
strength
13.
Bunsen's, 90
317
27.
31.
method by melting
strain,
317
18d. Combustion, heat
17.
205, 210
,,
315
16.
211
,,
313
314
above
0,
17.
by galvanometer, 209
by magneto-inductor, 243
,,
tension,
sea,
16.
by substitution, 202
by Wlieatstone's bridge,
,,
Aqueous vapour,
28.
measurement of very
296
solids,
11.
inductor,
,,
method by mixture,
84
,,
10((.
6.
209
of
mixture,
87
1.
meter, 204
by
by
liquids,
of year, 333
,,
by
method
,,
t,
32.
/,
,,
ice,
Lavoisier's, 89
Tables
Radios
method by melting
12a..
etc.,
of
331
Hygrometry, 316
Hydrometer
305
324
Logarithms of numbers, 338
Millimetres to inches, 315
scales,
Inclination, magnetic,
18.
196.
Newton's
36.
Numbers frequently
318
320
of,
required,
335
28a. Practical units, 328
Radius of sun, 333
33.
Reciprocals, 336
37.
Refraction, atmospheric, 333
34.
indices of, 321
,,
25 and 26, Resistance, galvanic, of
metals, 325, 327
20.
344
INDEX.
Tables (continued)
26.
galvanic,
Resistance,
tions,
of
solu-
326
31.
14.
28c.
322
and
water
platinum,
329
Spectra, flame, 318
19.
of elements, 319
19a.
,,
19a, Spectrum, solar, 319
37.
35.
Stars,
37.
mean
places
of,
334
317
Time of oscillation, reduction to
21.
29.
38.
7.
7a.
19a.
Unit
Wave - lengths,
weight, 198
,,
311
solar spectrum,
Printed by R.
WAVE-length, measurement
,,
252
jar (Lane's),
322
319
19a.
points of, 63
wet and dry bulb, 82
by
289
Weight in vacuo, reduction
Weights, correction of a
&
R. Clark, Edinburgh.
of,
relraction
to,
set,
121
spectrum,
35
33
Catalog-ue D.]
London, n,
New Burlington
Street,
July, 1890.
LIST
OF
J.
& A.
CHURCHILL'S
WORKS
ON
CHEMISTRY, MATERIA
MEDIC A,
PHARMACY, BOTANY,
THE MICROSCOPE,
AND
INDEX
Allen's
Kay-Shuttleworth's
Modem
Chemistry
Do.
Do.
Bentley's
Do.
Do.
Druggist's Receipt
Book
Vade Mecum
Lee's Microtomist's
Xll
...
xii
Systematic Botany...
xii
Mills'
xii
Book of Prescriptions
Manual of Botany ...
Structural Botany
...
Anatomy
Ord's Comparative
Bloxam's Chemistry
...
Laboratory Teaching
Bowman's
Phillips'
Cameron's
Oils, Resins,
Materia Medica
...
Varnishes
...
Proctor's Practical
vii
Rod well's
vii
Natural Philosophy
xiii
xiii
Southall's Materia
Handbooks
vii
iii
...
XV
Medica
Companion to Pharmacopeia
...
Stille
Squire's
...
xiii
xiii
Taylor on Poisons
vi
IV
vii
Ammonia, &c.
vii
Do.
Chemical Tables ...
Wagner's Chemical Technology
Wahltuch's Dictionary of Mat. Medica
xiv
...
Anatomy
of Invertebrates...
to the
...
vii
Do.
...
James's Guide
...
...
Acetic Acid,
...
Pharmacy
...
...
Pharmaceutical Journal
Practical Chemistry
...
Do.
Do.
...
...
Do.
..
New
XV
vii
vii
...
...
Do.
Veterinary Surgery
xiv
Wilson's Zoology
xiv
B.P.
* .*
in the United
Kingdom, or
in this
Catalogue
may
be obtained
on Remittance of their
cost.
A LIST OF
J.
CHURCHILL'S WORKS
& A.
ON SCIENCE
C. L.
Bloxain
CHEMISTRY, INORGANIC
With Experiments.
By Charles
and
Bloxam.
L.
By
the
With 282
John
Chemistry
Illustrations
in
the
Royal
8vo, i8s.
same Author
LABORATORY TEACHING:
in Practical Chemistry.
ORGANIC.
Seventh edition, by
Progressive Exercises
With 89 Engravings.
Crown 8vo, 5s. 6d.
Or,
Fifth Edition.
Crown
Chemistry.
Crown
8vo, 103.
F. Clowes
ANALYSIS.
A. Vaclicr
A PRIMER OF CHEMISTRY,
By Arthur Vacher
Including Analysis
.
i8mo,
is.
iv
J.
&
Works
Churchill's Scientific
A.
R,
Fresenius
.....
QUALITATIVE ANALYSIS.
Groves, F.R.S.
46 Engravings
Charles
Translated by
By
the
oi
E.
Spectra and
8vo, 15s.
same Author
QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS.
Seventh Edition.
8vo, 15s.
.
Translated by A. Vacher. With 106 Engravings
Vol. I.
Vol.2. Parts I and 2. Translated by C.E. Groves, F.R.S. With Engravings.
8vo, 28. 6d. each.
Bozvman and
J. E.
Bloxam
L.
C.
Including Analysis.
PRACTICAL CHEMISTRY,Bloxam.
Eighth
By John E. Bowman
With 90 Engravings
*^* In
and Charles
L.
Fcap
Edition.
8vo, 5s. 6d.
enlarged,
U, y. Kay-Shtittleworth
FIRST PRINCIPLES OF
By
Sir
U.
J.
MODERN CHEMISTRY.
Kay-Shuttleworth,
Second
Bart.
Edition.
8vo, 4s. 6d.
Crown
Campbell
Brown
J.
Qualitative Exercises
I.
Campbell Brown,
D.Sc.(Lond.),
Victoria University
'
.
yl.
E.
y oh?! son
By
Alfred
E. H. Cook
INTRODUCTORY
INORGANIC
ANALYSIS.
First
Course of Chemical Testing. By ERNEST H. Cook, D.Sc.Lond., F.C.S.,
Assoc. Roy. Coll. Sci
Physical Science Master, Merchant Venturers School,
;
Bristol.
Crown
8vo,
is.
6d.
&
J.
A.
Works
Churchill's Scientific
H. Forster Morley
A.,
'
By H. Forster
Dictionary of Chemistry."
Crown
W.
G. Valentin, IV.
7?.
By
tJie
same Aicthors
Way.
With Map
of Spectra
Wet
IV. G. Valejitin
Demon-
A. J. Bernays
F.I.C.,
School.
IN MEDICINE.
By Albert
Third Edition.
F.
J.
Bernays, Ph.D.,
FOR
F.C.S.,
St.
.
Crown
For
B.
V.
Tuson
RECEIPTS,
vi
&
J.
A.
E. J. Mills and F. J.
FUEL AND
Works
Churchill's Scientific
Rowan
ITS APPLICATIONS. By E
F.R.S., and F.
RowAN,
J.
Being Vol.
C.E.
I.
J.
Mills, D.Sc,
of Chemical Technology,
Edited by
in its application to Arts and Manufactures.
E. Groves, F.R.S., and William Thorp, B.Sc, with which is
" RICHARDSON and
Watts' Chemical Technology."
incorporated
Roy. 8vo, 30s.
With 606 Engravings, 802 pp.
or Chemistry
Charles
A. H. Allen
Treatise on the
Derbyshire, &c.
Alcohols, Neutral Alcoholic Derivatives, Sugars, Starch and
Vol. I.
Third
With Illustrations.
its Isomers, Vegetable Acids, &c.
8vo.
edition in preparation
Vol, II. Fixed Oils and Fats, Hydrocarbons, Phenols, &c. With
8vo.
Illustrations.
Third edition in preparation
.
Vol. III.
Part I. Aromatic Acids, Tannins, Dyes, and Colouring
8vo, 14s.
Matters
Part II.
Organic Bases, Cyanogen Compounds, Al\In the Press?\
buminoids, &c.
....
....
F. Si/tton
F. A. Fliickiger
Pharmacognostically Considered.
By Friedrich a. FLiiCKiGER, Ph.D., Professor in the University of
Strasburg, Germany.
Translated from the Original Text, with some
additional Notes, by Frederick B. Power. Ph.D., Professor of Pharmacy
and Materia Medica in the University of Wisconsin. With 8 Lithographic
Royal 8vo, 7s.
Plates and i Woodcut
:
R.
HANDBOOK
OF
Wagner and
IV. Crookes
CHEMICAL
TECHNOLOGY.
By
Rudolf Wagner,
The design
.......
of this
J.
&
A.
Works
Churchill's Scientific
&c.
Wines, Liqueurs,
of Beers, Spirits,
Crown
....
With Engravings
Formula;.
Ciown
With
8vo, 5s.
OILS,
RESINS,
AND VARNISHES.
SOAPS AND]CANDLES.
and
8vo, 5s.
Engravings.
Crown 8vo, 7s. 6d.
Crown
With 54 Engravings.
Stille
8vo, 7s.
MaiscJi
Crown
With
....
C.
Binz
CHnical Guide
.....
M
O.
ALCOHOL TABLES,
giving
Hehncr
for
all
Specific
Gravities,
from
-oooo to
Roy. 8vo,
0.
3s. 6d.
BUTTER
&
J.
Works
A. Churchill's Scientific
and
F. Royle
jf.
Harley
J.
ROYLE'S
THERAPEUTICS.
"This Manual
in
any language
is,
to
ourminds, unrivalled
British
"yoin'ual.
T/iorowgood
J. C.
C.
in
Thorowgood, M.D.
Engravings
Fcap. 8vo,
7s.
C.
D. F. Phillips
F.
/.
MATERIA MEDICA
By Charles
......
Phillips,
Vegetable
Kingdom Organic
8vo, 25s.
Oven
By
Manual
W. Southall
systematically arranged
with Brief Notices of the
the Indian and U.S. Pharmacopoeias, and Short
Descriptions of their Chief Adulterants and Substitutions.
By W.
Southall, F.L.S. Fourth Edition
Crown 8vo, 5s.
Remedies contained
in
....
F.
H. Leschcr
...
By
Therapeutics.
Third Edition
F.
Harwood Lescher,
Pereira
F.C.S.,
.
Medallist.
Svo, 2s. 6d.
A. Wahltuch
**
T^^ purpose
work
(2)
Tlierapcutics
(4)
is
(5) Preparations;
added to the work.
(6)
Prescriptions.
&
J.
A.
Churchill's Scientific
Works
B, S. Proctor
S.
Medicine,
J. Pereira
SELECTA % PRESCRIPTIS.
Selections
from
Physicians'
Prescriptions
containing
F.R.S,
24mo,
5s.
P. Squire
PHARMACOPCEIA
By
the
same Author
Fifth Edition
8vo, 6s.
*^* Mr. Squire has collected all the Formuloe used in twenty-five of the principal
Hospitals of London, and arranged them in groups for comparison. These Formula
were revised and approved by the medical staff of each of the Hospitals, and may
therefore be taken as an excellent guide to the medical practitioner, both as to dose and
The Diet Tables of the Hospitals are also included.
best menstruum in prescribing.
7. Baily
A PHYSICIAN'S PHARMACOPCEIA.
THE
Compiled by a Com-
or Interleaved,
cloth,
is.
&
J.
Churchill's Scientific
A.
Works
N. Tirard
containing
all
Prosser
B.P.
New
y antes.
Preparations.
Their Characters, Actions, Uses, &c. With
Full Therapeutical Commentary.
By Prosser James, M.D., late Lecturer
Third
on Materia Medica and Therapeutics at the London Hospital.
Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d.
Edition
of all the
...
A.
Taylor
S.
By Alfred
Medical Jurisprudence
with 104 Engravings
late Professor of
S.
Taylor, M.D.,
to Guy's Hospital.
F.R.S.,
Third Edition,
Crown
8vo, i6s.
W, Stowe
A TOXICOLOGICAL CHART,
Thirteenth Edition
Sheet, 2s.
Roller, 5s.
U. Beasley
THE
contain-
all
the
By
the
same Author
Comprising
Also
Containing upwards of
J.
&
A.
Works
Churchill's Scientific
Published weekly.
Price 4d,
free, 20s.
Containing the
Yearly Meeting of the British Pharmaceutical Conference, and a Report on the Progress of Pharmacy, which includes notices
of all Pharmaceutical Papers, new Processes, Preparations, and Formulas
published throughout the world. Published annually in December.
8vo, 1873 to 1889
los. each yearly volume.
General Index to the Volumes for 1864 to 1885 inclusive
3s. 6d.
at the
G. C.
IVittstein
PHARMACEUTICAL
PRACTICAL
CHEMISTRY: An
J. Steggall
FIRST
LINES
By John
Pharmaceutical Society.
iSmo,
3s. 6d.
7. B. Smith
........
SECOND EXAMINATIONS.
Second
By John Barker Smith.
Crown 8vo, 6s. 6d.
Latin Grammar Fractions Metric System
Materia Medica Botany
Pharmacy Chemistry Prescriptions.
Edition
R.
V.
Tuson
for the
Use
By Richard
of PracV. Tuson,
book
supplies a
G.
Armatage
J.
&
A.
Churchill's Scientific
Works
Williains
IV.
By
same Author
the
Sixth Edition.
With
Plates
and H. Trimen
R. Bentley
MEDICINAL PLANTS:
being
Descriptions
with
Original
R. Bentley
A MANUAL OF BOTANY:
fication, Properties,
By
the
same Author
....
....
PHYSIOLOGICAL BOTANY.
660
With
Fcap. 8vo,
7s. 6d.
A /so
of
Plants and
With
Descriptive Botany.
Fcap. 8vo,
3s. 6d.
.....
(Established in 1852.)
F.R.S.
of
Each Number,
los.
** Most of the Memoirs are illustrated by Woodcuts and Lithographic Plates, many
being Coloured. The Journal contains, in addition, Notes and Memoranda, Reviews of
Books, Quarterly Chronicle, and Proceedines of Societies.
J.
&
Churchill's Scientific
A.
IV. B.
Carpenter
Works
REVELATIONS.
ITS
By
S.
SECTION CUTTING
Marsh
and Mounting
....
A. B. Lee
'
of Microscopic
the Russian
Second Edition
Laboratory of Zoology
:
Handbook
of the
Anatomy.
at
Assistant
Villefranche-sur-mer (Nice.)
.
y. Fayrer
THE THANATOPHIDIA OF
INDIA;
being a Description
y.
Ewart
"
We
in
J.
&
A.
Churchill's Scientific
T.
Works
H. Huxley
Prof.
Huxley, LL.D.,
F.R.S.
6s.
....
Engravings
Post Svo,
12s.
W. M. Ord
Syllabus of
TABLES OF ZOOLOGY:
R. Greene
indicating
Sub-Orders,
the Tribes,
Orders, and Higher Groups of the Animal Kingdom, for Students, LecBy J. Reay Greene, M.D., late Professor of Natural
turers, and others.
Three large sheets, 5s.
History in the Queen's University in Ireland.
the set; or, mounted on canvas, with roller and varnished
12s. 6d.
.
A. \Vlis0)1
Manual
Author of Elements of
With Engravings
By Andrew Wilson,
on Zoology, Edinburgh.
Fcap
F. Kohlraiisch
C.
B.
Fox
B.
G. F. Rodwell
F. Rodwell, F.R.A.S.,
With 48 Engravings.
Fcap Svo 5s.
by G.
&
J.
Works
A. Churchill's Scientific
xv
L. Price
Crown
Amongst
Groups in the
the Contents are the Practical Treatment of Portraits
Studio Landscapes Groups in Open Air -Instantaneous Pictures -Animals ArchitecMarine Subjects -Still Life^Copying of Pictures, Prints, Drawings, Manuscripts,
ture
Interiors
Stereoscopy in Microphotography, &c., and Notices of the last Inventions
and Improvements in Lenses, Apparatus, &c.
*^^*
T.
F. Hardwich and
J. Traill Taylor
HARDWICH'S MANUAL OF PHOTOGRAPHIC CHEMISTRY, Theoretical and Practical. Ninth Edition. By J. Traill
Taylor, Editor of the Photographic Times and American Photographer^
With 57
and formerly Editor of the British Journal of Photography.
......
Engravings
Fcap. 8vo.
7s. 6d.
R. Dnnglison
it,
in the
all
kinds."
Mayne and W.
R. G.
IV.
IVagstaJfe.
being an Explanation
of
all
in
We
'
T.
Maxwell
Concise
F. Ti eves
A GERMAN-ENGLISH
TERMS.
DICTIONARY OF MEDICAL
xvi
The
J.
by
issued
be forwarded post
& A.
free
&
J.
Churchill
A.
on application
600 ivorks on
Medicine,
Works
A. Churchill's Scientific
Catalogues
following
will
A.
&
J.
to their Titles
&e., &c.,
with a cotKplete
includes B, C, attd D.
B.
Selection
from
J.
&
A.
CJiiirchilH s
all recent
the
Art and
Science
of Medicine.
C.
J.
& A ChnrchiW s
.
for Students.
D.
Selected
and
Descriptive List of J.
&
A. Churchill's zvorks
Zoology,
Science.
E.
The Medical
Intelligencer, being
a List of
yearly
to
every
Medical
Practitioner
India,
America.
United
to the
&
A.
Chiirchill.
in
the
ascertained.
States of America,
United Kingdom
number are
large
Continental
Europe,
J.
& A.
New
York,
and
THMnnv.
,,
vnrAxr
tjtttpt
TMr"rr^M
English Authors.
c-tdttt^t
QC
37
K613
1883
cop. 2
Phy.ica!
Applied Si
PLEASE
CARDS OR
DO NOT REMOVE
SLIPS
UNIVERSITY
FROM
THIS
OF TORONTO
LIBRARY